Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition
2020 RENEGADE
2020 RENEGADE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................78
4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 99
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................156
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 238
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 279
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................324
9 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 332
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................466
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ 470
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................. 9
Essential Information .................................... 9
Symbols .......................................................... 9
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................11
Key Fob With Remote Control.....................11
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................15
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...16
How To Use Remote Start ...........................16
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped ................................................... 17
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle................................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .......................................................... 17
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .................................................. 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer And
Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped........ 18
General Information .................................... 18
SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 19
Key Programming ....................................... 19
Replacement Keys....................................... 19
General Information .................................... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED..... 20
To Arm The System ..................................... 20
To Disarm The System ............................... 21
Disabling ...................................................... 21
DOORS................................................................... 21
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21
Power Door Locks ....................................... 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped) ..................................................... 23
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If
Equipped ...................................................... 26
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ................ 26
Child Locks .................................................. 27
SEATS ................................................................... 28
Manual Front Seats..................................... 28
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ................... 29
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped.... 31
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 32
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 ..... 33
HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................. 33
Front Head Restraints ................................. 34
Rear Head Restraints.................................. 34
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 35
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 35
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 35
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .......................................................................36
Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 36
Get Started................................................... 36
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 37
General Information .................................... 37
Additional Information................................. 38
MIRRORS...............................................................38
Inside Day/Night Mirror .............................. 38
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ........... 38
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 38
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 40
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 40
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................40
Headlights ................................................... 40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .................................................. 40
High Beams ................................................. 40
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 41
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 41
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................. 41
Parking Lights .............................................. 41
Headlight Delay .......................................... 42
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 42
Turn Signals ................................................. 42
Lane Change Assist..................................... 43
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 43
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................43
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 43
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
WIPERS AND WASHERS ....................................45
Front Wiper Operation .................................45
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 46
Rear Wiper Operation.................................. 47
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped .... 48
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................48
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations —
Passenger Compartment ............................48
Manual Climate Controls Overview ............ 49
Automatic Climate Control Overview ..........51
Climate Voice Commands ...........................57
Operating Tips ............................................. 58
WINDOWS..............................................................60
Power Window Controls............................... 60
Auto-Down Feature .....................................60
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped .............................61
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................61
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 61
POWER MY SKY SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED......61
Power My Sky Operation .............................61
Emergency Open/Close............................... 63
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 63
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ........................................64
Opening ........................................................64
Closing.......................................................... 64
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 65
Power Sun Shade ........................................65
Auto Reverse Feature..................................65
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 66
HOOD .................................................................... 66
To Open The Hood ....................................... 66
To Close The Hood....................................... 66
LIFTGATE ............................................................... 67
Opening ........................................................ 67
Closing.......................................................... 68
Cargo Area Features.................................... 68
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 71
Glove Compartment .................................... 71
Sun Visors .................................................... 71
USB/Media Player Control .......................... 72
Power Outlets............................................... 73
Power Inverter — If Equipped...................... 74
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped......................... 75
Ashtray — If Equipped.................................. 75
Front Armrest ............................................... 76
Cupholders .................................................. 76
Handle Grip .................................................. 76
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............ 77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................................... 78
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 79
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..................... 80
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ........................................................ 80
Oil Change Reset ......................................... 81
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 82
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................. 86
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ............................................................86
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 87
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 90
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 94
White Indicator Lights ................................. 95
Blue Indicator Lights ................................... 95
Green Indicator Lights................................. 96
Gray Indicator Lights ................................... 96
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) ........96
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................... 97
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................97
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...............................................99
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 99
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System....100
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....................... 107
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped.................................................107
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped..........112
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................................117
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 123
Occupant Restraint Systems ....................123
Important Safety Precautions...................123
Seat Belt Systems .....................................124
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...130
Child Restraints .........................................141
Transporting Pets.......................................153
SAFETY TIPS....................................................... 153
Transporting Passengers ..........................153
Exhaust Gas ..............................................153
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .......................................................154
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................155
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 156
Tip Start Feature .......................................156
If Engine Fails To Start .............................156
Cold Weather Operation............................157
Extended Park Starting..............................157
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine.........................................................158
Stopping The Engine..................................158
Turbocharger “Cool Down” —
If Equipped .................................................158
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 158
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)......................... 159
Auto Park Brake.........................................161
SafeHold.....................................................161
Brake Service Mode ..................................162
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .... 163
Shifting .......................................................163
Downshifting ..............................................164
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................................................165
Gear Selector .............................................166
Gear Ranges ..............................................167
Transmission Limp Home Mode...............170
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................171
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System........................................................171
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ..........................................171
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)..............................171
SELEC-TERRAIN..................................................173
Mode Selection Guide...............................173
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED ....174
POWER STEERING .............................................174
STOP/START SYSTEM .......................................174
Automatic Mode.........................................174
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................175
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................175
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................176
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................176
System Malfunction...................................176
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ....................176
Activation....................................................177
Setting A Desired Speed ...........................177
Varying The Speed.....................................177
Accelerating For Passing...........................178
Resume Speed ..........................................178
Deactivation...............................................178
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 178
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation ...................................................180
To Activate/Deactivate..............................180
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)...........................................................180
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................181
To Cancel ...................................................181
To Turn Off .................................................181
To Resume .................................................182
To Vary The Speed Setting........................182
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ....183
Overtake Aid...............................................184
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........185
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........185
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........187
General Information ..................................189
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode ..........................................................189
REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED................. 191
Rear ParkSense Sensors ..........................191
Enabling And Disabling Rear
ParkSense..................................................192
Operation With A Trailer ............................193
Service The Rear ParkSense System.......193
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....193
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 194
ParkSense Sensors ...................................195
ParkSense Warning Display......................195
ParkSense Display.....................................195
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........199
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................200
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............200
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....200
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System .....201
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 204
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................204
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................205
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................209
Exiting The Parking Space.........................214
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 218
LaneSense Operation................................218
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................218
LaneSense Warning Message ..................218
Changing LaneSense Status.....................222
REAR BACK UP CAMERA.................................. 222
ADDING FUEL ..................................................... 223
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 225
Certification Label......................................225
TRAILER TOWING...............................................226
Common Towing Definitions .....................227
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................228
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)..........................................229
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................229
Towing Requirements ...............................230
Towing Tips.................................................232
RECREATIONAL TOWING ..................................233
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................233
Recreational Towing..................................234
DRIVING TIPS......................................................234
On-Road Driving Tips .................................234
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................235
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................238
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....238
General Information ..................................242
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................242
General Information ..................................242
Replacement Bulbs ...................................243
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................244
Replacing Interior Bulbs............................252
FUSES ..................................................................255
General Information ..................................255
Access To The Fuses .................................255
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit .............................................................256
Body Computer Fuse Center.....................259
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
Unit .............................................................261
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ....................... 262
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ..........262
Preparations For Jacking .........................263
Jacking Instructions ..................................264
Road Tire Installation ................................267
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 268
Tire Service Kit Storage.............................268
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation ...................................................268
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........269
Replacing The Sealant ..............................270
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 270
Preparations For Jump Start.....................270
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................271
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 272
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 273
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 274
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 275
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 276
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)...........................276
Four Wheel Drive (4WD)............................277
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......277
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 278
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 278
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 279
Maintenance Plan......................................280
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 287
1.3L Turbo Engine .....................................287
2.4L Engine ................................................288
Checking Oil Level......................................289
Cooling System ..........................................289
Adding Washer Fluid..................................290
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................290
Pressure Washing......................................290
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 291
Engine Oil ..................................................291
Engine Oil Filter..........................................292
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................292
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................292
Body Lubrication........................................293
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................293
Exhaust System ........................................295
Cooling System ..........................................296
Brake System.............................................299
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........300
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...301
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 302
TIRES ................................................................... 302
Tire Safety Information..............................302
Tires — General Information......................309
Tire Types ...................................................313
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................314
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................315
Tire Chains And Traction Devices ............316
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............317
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................318
Treadwear ..................................................318
Traction Grades .........................................319
Temperature Grades .................................319
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................319
BODYWORK ........................................................320
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......320
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........321
Preserving The Bodywork..........................321
INTERIORS .........................................................322
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................322
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................322
Leather Parts .............................................322
Glass Surfaces ..........................................323
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION .................................324
Vehicle Identification Number ..................324
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................324
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................324
Torque Specifications................................324
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................325
1.3L Turbo Engine .....................................325
2.4L Engine................................................325
Reformulated Gasoline .............................326
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................326
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......326
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..326
MMT In Gasoline........................................327
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................327
Fuel System Cautions................................327
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................328
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 329
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................ 330
Engine ........................................................330
Chassis ......................................................331
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 332
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 333
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings ..................................333
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings .................................344
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Settings ......................................................356
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 371
Identifying Your Radio ...............................371
Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................373
Safety And General Information ...............374
UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 376
Steering Wheel Audio Controls.................376
Radio Mode ...............................................377
Media Mode ..............................................389
Phone Mode ..............................................393
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 408
Android Auto™ ...........................................408
Apple CarPlay® ..........................................411
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks...................................................414
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED (UCONNECT
4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY ONLY) ....... 415
Operating Navigation ................................415
Where To? .................................................415
View Map ...................................................428
Information ................................................437
Emergency .................................................439
Map Updates .............................................440
SiriusXM® Travel Link ..............................440
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus ..............................441
CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED ......... 441
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™ ......441
Getting Started With SiriusXM
Guardian™ .................................................442
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................444
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account.......................................................457
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ...........................458
SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours: ....458
Connected Services SOS FAQs .................458
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs ...........................................................458
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....458
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ...........................................................459
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs .......................................459
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs ..............................................460
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs............................................................460
Connected Services Account FAQs...........460
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs ...........................................................463
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....463
Regulatory And Safety Information...........463
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 466
Prepare For The Appointment ..................466
Prepare A List.............................................466
Be Reasonable With Requests.................466
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 466
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................467
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........467
In Mexico Contact......................................467
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............467
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................467
Service Contract .......................................467
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 468
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 468
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 468
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................468
In Canada...................................................468
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 469
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®
parts, and care about your satisfaction.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning/
Indicator Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle
safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
1
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal
use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
Key Fob With Remote Control
The key fob with Remote Control contains a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) feature. The
Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock
or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
Key Fob Emergency Key Release
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — PANIC
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm
will arm.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the key
fob. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key fob is left inside
the passenger compartment, otherwise the
doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With
Remote Control
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar and replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The push button ignition has three operating
positions. The three positions are OFF, ON, and
RUN.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
No electrical devices are available.
ON
The vehicle is not running.
Some electrical devices are available
RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition in the ON
or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating".
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be manually started with a
push of the START/STOP ignition button after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear Selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi-
cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi-
cle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp. Then the engine
will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operations are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the ignition START/STOP
ignition button.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically activate when ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C). These
features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start.
Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for
further information.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
And Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer and the Rear
Defrost will be enabled. Exiting remote start will
resume previous operation, except if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation
will continue.
Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for
further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the
engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse.
The turn signals will flash.
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” in "Doors" in this chapter
for further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to
unlock the door. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry” in "Doors" in this chapter for
further information.
Place the ignition in the OFF mode to disarm
the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during liftgate entry. If someone enters the
vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case
of long inactivity of the car), lock the doors by
turning the emergency key in the exterior door
lock cylinder.
NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the
event of a failure to the system or to turn the
alarm off, place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock button
on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent or rotate the door lock button until the
lock symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is
shut, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure
the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
All doors and the liftgate can be programmed to
unlock on the use of one of the front door
interior handles. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information on
programming locking and unlocking
preferences.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside
With the doors closed, insert the emergency key
into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and
turn to the right to lock the driver's door.
To unlock the driver’s door, insert the
emergency key into the driver exterior door lock
cylinder and turn to the left to unlock the
driver's door.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of
the front door trim panels. Use this switch to
lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel door.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle’s Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the
vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. Always make sure the ignition is in
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition in the ON
or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system
if equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” in this section for further
information.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry
door handle, and no door is opened within
60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle’s Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock all four doors.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors using any Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry
vehicle:
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, and it does not find any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then
the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Electronic Liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of electronic
liftgate release.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock
the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed in the instrument cluster
display, if equipped, only the liftgate will
unlock when you push the Electronic
Release. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is
programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will
unlock when you push the electronic unlock/
lock button on the liftgate. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia.”
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the key fob battery is low or depleted, the
emergency key can be used to unlock the driver
side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as
follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to
the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key
fob with Remote Control housing.
Emergency Key Release
NOTE:
The emergency key can be inserted into the
door lock cylinder from either direction.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If
Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will
unlock all the doors when any door is opened if
the vehicle is stopped and in PARK.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that
prevents the use of the internal door handles of
the vehicle and the power door lock switch.
This device prevents the doors from opening
within the passenger compartment.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be severely
injured or killed. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a loca-
tion accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could start the vehicle, operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat buildup may cause them to be
severely injured or killed
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Arming The Dead Lock Device
The device works on all doors and requires
two pushes of the lock button on the key fob.
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the
device will also work by pushing the lock
button on the driver’s or passenger’s side
exterior door handle.
The arming of the device is indicated by three
flashes of the turn signals.
The device does not operate if one or more
doors are not properly closed.
Disarming The Device
The device will automatically disarm by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob. For
vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the
device will also disarm by using the driver or
passenger Passive Entry door handle to
unlock and open the door.
Placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can only be opened by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the lock/unlock dial to the unlocked
position, roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Front Seats Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on
the bar and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
lever to raise the seat height or push downward
on the lever to lower the seat height.
Height Adjustment Lever
Manual Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Adjustment Lever
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat
which increases the storage of the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be
necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Be sure that the front
seats are fully upright and positioned
forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure
the rear armrest in the upright position.
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply opening
the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibil-
ity or become a dangerous projectile in a sud-
den stop or collision.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides
additional storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
2. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of
the seat.
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both
sides of the rear seatbacks completely
forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area
allows you to carry a single passenger on the
right side of the rear seat, while the
enlargement of the right side allows you to carry
two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer
to “Cargo Area Features” in “Liftgate” in
this chapter for details.
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of
the seat and rest them on the seat belt
guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the
left or right rear seatback completely
forward.
Rear Seat Release
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
1. Move the seat belts to the seat belt guides
on the top edge of the seat to ensure the
seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until
they lock on both the latches. Verify the red
notches are no longer visible on the release
lever. If the red notches are visible, the
seatback is not secure.
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the
outboard side of the seat, close to the floor.
Power Seat Switches
Use the switch to move the seat up/down,
forward/rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set
the angle of the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down — If Equipped
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the recline switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
1 — Power Seat Adjustment Switch
2 — Power Seat Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase
or decrease the lumbar support. Push the
switch upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
NOTE:
Power seat adjustments are only allowed when
the ignition is in the ON position, and for about
30 minutes after it is placed in the OFF position.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat buttons are located in your
vehicle’s touchscreen or on the instrument
panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 145 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s heated
seat will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40
Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the
seat and pull forward.
Armrest Tab Location
Fold Center Armrest Forward
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as a rear armrest with cupholders.
Rear Armrest With Cupholders
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard
head restraints and one center head restraint
for its rear passengers. The rear head restraints
can be raised or lowered. When the center seat
is being occupied, the head restraint should be
in the raised position. When there are no
occupants in the center seat, the head restraint
can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/
telescoping lever downward (toward the floor).
To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the
tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully
engaged.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel switch has been turned on, it will stay
on for an average of 80 minutes or more before
automatically shutting off. This time will vary
based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may
not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm. The heated steering wheel control button
is located in your vehicle’s touchscreen or on
the instrument panel.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the heated steering
wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while driv-
ing or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn-
ing may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Voice Recognition
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
Get Started
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science, and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call and
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, Navigation And Climate Functions
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window. Headlight
glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the lever under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while the lever under
the mirror is set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Mirror Adjustment
NOTE:
The mirror will automatically release in the
event of heavy contact with a passenger.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
right of the button does not illuminate.
Dimming Mirror
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle’s
transmission has been placed in REVERSE.
Outside Mirrors
Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver’s door panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection
switch to the left or to the right and then push
the mirror adjustment switch in the four
directions indicated by arrows.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN position.
The power mirror switches will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the
control to the neutral position to avoid acci-
dental movements.
Power Mirror Switch
Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners
of the mirrors till desired alignment is obtained.
Manual Adjustment Mirror
Folding Mirror
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid
damage. The mirror has three detent positions:
full forward, normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped
Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to fold
or unfold the exterior mirrors.
To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain
active for up to three minutes after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature can be activated
whenever you turn on the Rear
Window Defroster. Refer to “Climate Controls”
in this chapter for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn the light off.
Vanity Mirror
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The headlight switch
controls the operation of the headlights, side
marker and parking lights, daytime running
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the
instrument cluster and interior lighting.
Headlight Switch
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located on
the instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled
through Uconnect Settings, will turn on when
the instrument cluster is on and remain on
unless the headlights are turned on or the
instrument cluster is switched off.
In the bulb lighting version, the DRLs will be
disabled during turn signal operation and
resume operation when the turn signal
operation has ended.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the
turn signal lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) and an indicator will illuminate in the
cluster. To turn off the high beams, pull the turn
signal lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle).
1 — Mirror Light
2 — Mirror Cover
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams
to activate.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the headlights
to turn on at high beam and remain on until the
lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the last detent (AUTO position) for
automatic headlight operation. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
before the headlights will come on in the auto-
matic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared
LED, located on the windshield. It detects
changes in light intensity outside the vehicle,
based on the sensitivity of light set by using the
menu on the display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount
of external light required for controlling the
lighting.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order to activate the Auto-
matic High Beams.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically
turns the headlights on or off based on ambient
light levels.
Parking Lights
Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent to
turn on the parking lights. The parking light
indicator in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving
your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the STOP/OFF position while the headlights
are still on. The delay interval begins when the
headlight switch is turned off from the low beam
position.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position and
headlights were on before the ignition is STOP/
OFF, the delay interval begins automatically.
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the
headlights, the parking lights or by placing the
ignition in the RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is
turned on, they will turn off in the normal
manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two minutes
of placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position
to activate this feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on
the parking lights or the low beam
headlights and push the fog light
button on the headlight switch. The front fog
lights feature is latching, which means that
every time that the button is pressed and the
fog lights are activated, the vehicle memorizes
the request and re-activates the front fog lights
every time that the parking lights or low beams
are active. To deactivate the feature, push the
front fog button again. The front fog lights are
deactivated each time the parking or low beam
lights are deactivated or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When
activated, a light incorporated in the front fog
light will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal
indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
In the bulb lighting version, if the Daytime Running
Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the
Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of
the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The
Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the
turn signal is turned off.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (left or
right) will flash to signal other drivers of a lane
change, then automatically turn off.
Courtesy Lights
The Courtesy Lights feature allows you to activate
the low beam, parking lights, and sidemarker
lights for 25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked
(through the key fob or the Passive Entry door
handles [if equipped]). The Courtesy Lights
feature can be activated or deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with
the feature active, the activation of the lights is
extended for 10 seconds. The feature is disabled
when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights Dimmer Switch
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, lower
instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights,
and cubby bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate
the instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel. The
instrument panel dimmer has two positions at
the top of the thumb wheel. The first top detent
position puts the interior lighting into daytime
mode and the very top detent position
illuminates all the interior lights. The bottom
detent position of the instrument panel dimmer
dims the internal backlights to their lowest
dimmable setting and disables the interior
lights.
Headlight Switch
Front Lights
The courtesy lights are mounted between the
sun visors above the rear view mirror. The light
switches are used to turn the lights on or off.
Driver’s Courtesy Lights
Courtesy Light Switches
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
1— Left Switch
2— Right Switch
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent
the battery from discharging once the doors
are closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be
turned off after approximately 15 minutes
after the ignition is in the OFF position.
Rear Lights
Push the button on the rear dome light once to
turn the light on, and the lights will remain on at all
times. Push the button a second time to turn the
light off, and the lights will remain off at all times.
Rear Dome Light Button
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof,
there are two interior lights located above the
grab handles of the rear doors.
Rear Interior Light
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
Dome Light Timing
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate
when the doors are unlocked, the doors are
opened or after the doors are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the doors is opened, the dome
light will illuminate for approximately three
minutes.
When the doors are closed, the dome light
will automatically shut off after approxi-
mately 27 seconds.
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the
following conditions:
The dome light is disabled when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically
when the doors are locked.
The dome lights will automatically turn off
after approximately 15 minutes of inactivity
to preserve the battery.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the
following conditions when the ignition is placed
to the OFF position and the key is removed:
The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds
after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion.
The opening of one of the doors (approxi-
mately three minutes).
After closing a door (approximately 27
seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the
doors are locked.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated
by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever.
Windshield Wiper Lever
Front Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the
two detent positions for intermittent settings,
the third detent for low wiper operation and the
fourth for high wiper operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the wind-
shield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push
the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. The feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of the two detent
positions for intermittent settings, to activate
this feature.
NOTE:
If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from
off to the first intermittent setting or from the
first intermittent setting to the second intermit-
tent setting, the wipers will perform a round up
to clean the windshield.
This function can be activated or deactivated by
the Uconnect Settings through the radio. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Rain Sensor
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
When the user changes the ignition position
from OFF to ON/RUN with the lever already in
the intermittent position, no wipe cycle is
performed for safety reasons. This temporary
inhibition avoids accidental activations of the
wiping (e.g during the hand washing of the
windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow
conditions). The user can activate the Rain
Sensing Wipers in three ways:
Moving the lever in off position and then to
an intermittent position.
One MIST command actuation.
The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h)
and the rain sensor detects the presence of
rain.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with automatic transmis-
sion, the Rain Sensing Wipers will become inac-
tive even if the lever is in one of the intermittent
positions if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL
and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). This prevents damage to the wind-
shield wipers during an automatic car wash.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
(Continued)
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the
lever.
NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform
one round up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation. If the front wiper is set to Automatic
Mode (on the wiper lever as well as “Enabled”
through Uconnect settings), placing the rear
wiper in an intermittent position will cause the
front and rear wipers to sync up. Turning the
front wipers off will cause the rear wipers to also
stop.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is
desired. If the lever is pushed while in
the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released, the pump will
resume normal operation.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is
located with the Climate Controls on
the instrument panel. Push this
button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut
the defroster off, push the button a second
time.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s heated
seat will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated
under the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically
in the case of a cold weather manual start
with full front defrost, and the ambient
temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically
when the rear defrost is turned on and the
ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation —
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 40°F
(4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be
enabled. Upon exiting remote start mode the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on.
Remote Start Operation can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield
Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
When placing the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/
RUN position, the Rear Window Defroster and
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn
on when the outside ambient temperature is
less than 40°F (4.4°C).
The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield
Wiper De-Icer automatically turn off after
approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut
the defroster/windshield off, push the button a
second time.
Auto On can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow amount or air
flow speed, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located
on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations —
Passenger Compartment
Left Side Air Outlets
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
1 — Adjustable Air Outlet
2 — Air Vane Adjustment
3 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
4 — Fixed Air Outlet
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Center Air Outlets
Right Side Air Outlets
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Manual Climate Controls
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Adjustable Air Outlet
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
Icon Description
MAX A/C Control
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until
it is set to MAX A/C. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning. The A/C LED light illuminates when the A/C is on.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button on the Blower Control knob to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. The Recirculation LED light illuminates when Recirculation mode is on.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selec-
tion. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button on the Mode Control knob to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the Rear Defrost is on.
Temperature Control
Use the Temperature Control Knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the
knob counterclockwise, from the top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the
knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperature.
Blower Control
Rotate the control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed
increases as you move the control clockwise from the “O” (off) position.
Modes Control Knob
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy condi-
tions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Icon Description
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C,
the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C control button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO
control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touch-
screen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. Continuous use of the Recir-
culation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
AUTO Button
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting the airflow temperature, distribu-
tion and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and
automatic mode. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The indica-
tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-
screen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Icon Description
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control
Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings independently. Pushing the blue arrow
indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates warmer temperatures.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Mode But-
ton
Mode Control
Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There are shut off wheels located below the air vanes, above the center air outlet, and next to the passenger air
outlet to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy condi-
tions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Icon Description
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC
panel. The system regulates the amount of
airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
and passenger temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode, and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the
front blower knob setting.
Climate Voice Commands
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost
button to turn the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the
rear defrost indicator light on the instrument
panel turning on. If equipped, push the rear
defrost button to activate the defrosting of door
mirrors and heated rear window.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window
defroster heating filaments do not affix stick-
ers or other objects to the inside of the rear
glass.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so
that the LED is on, to enter recirculation mode.
It is recommended to turn the internal air
recirculation on while standing in traffic or in
tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted
air.
Do not use the function for a long period of time,
particularly if there are many passengers in the
vehicle, to prevent the windows from misting
up.
NOTE:
Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not
use the internal air recirculation function on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably
increase the possibility of the windows misting.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be
turned on at least once a month for
approximately 10 minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealership before the Summer.
NOTE:
This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in posi-
tion.
Cool & Humid Condi-
tions
Set the mode control
to and turn
on to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window switch is located on the
driver’s door panel. The driver’s power window
switch controls the operation of all the windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is
not possible to move any windows.
The power window switches will remain
active for up to three minutes after the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch
Push the Power Window Lockout switch to
disable rear passenger window controls. When
this feature is active, the LED light will
illuminate and only the driver can operate the
rear passenger windows. To undo this feature,
push the switch again and the LED will turn off.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
front and rear passenger doors window
switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second
and release. The window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power win-
dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children,
and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped
The driver door power window switch and the
front passenger door window switch have an
Auto-Up feature.
Pull the window switch up, for about half a
second, and release and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way (manually), pull
the window switch up briefly and release it.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window switch again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
the switch and hold to close the window
manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER MY SKY SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Power My Sky Operation
Open/Close The Front Panel
The power My Sky switches are located on the
overhead console. The switches are used to
open and close the front panel.
Front Panel Operation Switch
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin-
gers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operation Switch
To automatically retract the front panel to the
open position, push the open/close button and
release. From the fully open position, pull the
open/close switch and release. The front panel
will close completely.
To stop the movement of the front panel during
automatic closing or opening, briefly push the
open/close switch.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the front panel push and release the
vent switch.
During the vent operation any push on the
open/close switch will stop the closing of the
panel.
NOTE:
If the My Sky is in open position, the vent
switch must be held until the panel vents.
The power roof controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
If the Remote Start functionality is active, it
will not be possible to move the roof.
Auto-Reverse Feature
The front panel of the retractable roof is
equipped with an auto-reverse safety system
that is able to detect the presence of an
obstacle during the opening and closing motion
of the panel.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops
and reverses immediately.
NOTE:
With both panels removed the retractable roof
cannot be opened or closed.
Sunroof Reinitialization
The following procedure must be followed to
reinitialize the sunroof and calibrate obstacle
detection:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the front panel close switch
until the sunroof panel is fully closed, then
release the switch.
3. Open the driver side front door.
4. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back in
the ON/RUN position.
6. Push and hold the front panel close switch
again. The reinitialization process will begin
within 10 seconds. Do not release the
switch.
7. The sunroof will stop and an audible “click”
will be heard.
8. Release the front panel close switch, then
push and hold it again within 5 seconds. Do
not release the switch.
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
9. As the front panel close switch is held, the
sunroof panel will cycle to the fully open
position and then back to the fully closed
position again.
10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped,
release the front panel close switch.
Sunroof reinitialization and obstacle
calibration is now complete.
NOTE:
If the switch is released prior to the sunroof
completing the above procedure, the entire
process must be repeated.
Emergency Open/Close
If the power My Sky switch fails, the retractable
roof can be operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the
inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is
supplied in the tool bag in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the
key hole and turn it clockwise to open the
roof or counter-clockwise to close.
Emergency Key And Key Hole
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
1 — Key Hole
2 — Allen Key
CAUTION!
When refitting panels, be careful to avoid
fingers, scarves, ties and items of clothing
from getting caught under the panels them-
selves.
Do not open the roof in the presence of
snow or ice. There is risk of damage.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening
Opening Sunroof
To retract the sunroof to the open position, push
the Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully
open. The sunroof can be stopped in any
position by pushing/pulling the switch a second
time while opening.
Venting Sunroof
To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch.
NOTE:
The vent switch has the automatic function only
at the opening of the sunroof. During the closing
of the sunroof, the switch must be held until
closed.
Closing
Closing Sunroof
To close the sunroof completely, pull the Open/
Close switch and the sunroof will fully close. The
sunroof can be stopped in any position by
pushing/pulling the switch a second time while
it is closing.
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close
2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close
3 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-
ating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Power Sun Shade
Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Push the shade switch for about one-half
second and the shade will automatically open.
During the automatic open operation, any
movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade part way (manually), push
the shade switch briefly and release.
Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Pull the shade switch for about one-half second
and the shade will automatically close. During
the automatic close operation, any movement
of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade part way (manually), pull the
shade switch briefly and release.
NOTE:
The sunroof and the shade controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is
not possible to move the sunroof.
Auto Reverse Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during the Automatic
Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of
the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
WARNING!
Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be severely injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push
the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The hood
release lever is located behind the center
front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch
Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is locked
into position.
Locking Tab
Support Rod And Seat
To Close The Hood
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the
other hand, remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
1 — Safety Latch Location 1 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or
activate the power door lock switches located
on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located
under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the
yellow tab.
Emergency Opening Tab Location
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab
slot to trigger the release tab of the liftgate.
Emergency Release Tab Slot Location
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location (If Equipped)
1 — Yellow Tab
1 — Release Tab Slot
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate reaches self closing position.
Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key fob because the liftgate
may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located
to the right of the outside handle release will
lock the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release.
Cargo Area Features
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the
shelf at the eyelets.
Rear Shelf Support Links
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage
shelf.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf,
and then remove the rear shelf pulling it
upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo
area, or behind the front seatbacks.
Adjusting The Rear Shelf
Rear Shelf Pin
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle
1 — Eyelets
2 — Links
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Cargo Load Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that
can be adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor
flat for ease of loading/unloading objects from
the cargo area. This position also makes it
possible to use the space below as another
compartment for storing fragile or smaller
objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger
seat is folded flat, it will allow for loading objects
of long dimensions. It is recommended to use
this position only during the actual transporting
of the objects, then bring the load floor in
position 1.
Table Tilt Load
In addition to the two positions described
above, the load floor can also be placed in a
tilted position, slanted toward the rear
seatbacks as to ease the access to the
underlying zone of the luggage compartment
(e.g. to pick up the spare tire or the
Tire Service Kit).
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the
supports 1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
The load floor provides securing of any cargo
inside this position, so that the cargo will not
slide in the case of sudden braking.
Load Floor
Table Tilt Load Supports
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment,
proceed as follows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
Load Floor Handle
2. Place the desired objects inside the
compartment.
1 — Loading Floor Support One
2 — Loading Floor Support Two
1 — Cargo Load Floor
2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the load floor.
Cargo Area Storage
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load floor from the lower to the
upper position, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the
load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side
panel guides and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and
container carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove
the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
floor, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Tie-Downs
The side panels may be equipped with three
grocery hooks (one on the left side and two on
the right side) for securing loads that are not
excessively heavy.
Grocery Hook
Grocery Hooks
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central
position with respect to cargo area.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box
that can be used for the storage of objects that
allows you to obtain a uniform level when
loading.
Cargo Box
NOTE:
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity
of distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment proceed as
follows:
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle
emergency key.
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Opening The Glove Compartment
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will
turn on to illuminate the compartment.
NOTE:
Do not insert objects in the glove compart-
ment that will not allow the compartment to
fully close.
The glove compartment should be
completely closed while the vehicle is in
motion.
Sun Visors
Sun visors are located on both sides of the
rearview mirror. The visors can be lowered or
moved to the side to help block sunlight from
entering the windshield or door glass.
To move the sun visor against the driver or
passenger door glass, remove the sun visor
from the hook and turn it toward the side
window.
1 — Glove Compartment Handle
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor Mirror
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors
to allow use in low light conditions.
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the
mirror.
Extendible Sun Visor
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass
by detaching it from the hook and turning it
toward the side window.
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide
coverage more to the rear.
Sliding Sun Visor
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even
more side coverage toward the rear.
Using The Extender
USB/Media Player Control
This feature allows an external device to be
plugged into the USB port or AUX Jack.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
Located below the heating ventilation and air
conditioning controls is the front USB port and
AUX jack.
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Rear Center Console USB Port
Located on the rear of the center console is a
second USB port.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB
port may be charge only, or media file capable.
Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port —
If Equipped
Power Outlets
The front power outlet is located under the
center stack of the instrument panel. It only
operates with the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. The power outlet can power mobile
phones, electronics and other low power
devices.
12 Volt Power Outlet
Models equipped with the optional "Smoker
Kit”, will have a cigar lighter instead of the
power outlet. Refer to “Cigar Lighter" in this
section for further information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rat-
ing is exceeded the fuse protecting the sys-
tem will need to be replaced.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter
outlet located on the back of the center console
to convert DC current to AC current. The Power
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
115 Volt Power Inverter
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on
and off when the device is plugged in or
removed.
In order for the Power Inverter to work, the
engine must be running and there must be no
faults detected with the alternator.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the Power
Inverter.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho-
rized dealer through Mopar parts.
The cigar lighter is located under the center
stack of the Instrument Panel. Push lighter
inward to heat.
Cigar Lighter
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
returns to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
Ashtray — If Equipped
NOTE:
Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be
placed into one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rat-
ing is exceeded the fuse protecting the sys-
tem will need to be replaced.
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front
seats.
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it
forward or rearward.
Front Armrest
Storage Compartment
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest
to access the storage compartment.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers, located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders located in the rear
armrest if equipped.
Rear Cupholders
Handle Grip
The handle grip is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel. The handle can be
used to enter or exit the vehicle or when
traveling on rough terrain.
Handle Grip
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof
Luggage Rack for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the Roof Luggage Rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do
not increase the total load carrying capacity of
the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on
the Roof Luggage Rack, do not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed
over the cargo area.
Do not use the retractable roof when using the
crossbars.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-
ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop-
erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
4. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF position, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Settings
Setting the system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu and submenus.
DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the main menu and submenus.
RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
The OK button may be used to confirm selec-
tion or held to reset specific screens.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Due”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON
or RUN position. To reset the oil change
indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. See an authorized dealer
to have the oil life reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of
the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until “Vehicle Info” is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right arrow button and Coolant Temp will be
displayed. Push the right or left arrow button to
scroll through the following information
displays:
Tire Pressure — View the information relating
to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (If
Equipped).
Coolant Temperature — View the engine
coolant temperature.
Trans Temperature — View the trans oil
temperature.
Oil Temperature — View the oil temperature.
Battery Voltage — View the voltage value
(state of charge) of the battery.
Service — View the service status message(s)
(If Equipped).
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title displayed is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Fuel Economy
This menu item allows you to view the fuel
economy of the vehicle. The following will
display:
Range (Miles or km)
Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or
km/l)
Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or
km/l)
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the
display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
This menu shows messages related to Stop/
Start. Only one message can be viewed at a
time until the condition is cleared. When the
Stop/ Start is engaged (and the engine is off),
the associated hardware telltale is turned on.
Whenever a user pushes the Stop/Start button
on the central stack, a pop up message of the
Stop/Start status will appear on the instrument
cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
This menu item allows you to change the
position of the information on the display.
Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable
Multi-Functional Display And Automatic
Transmission)
By selecting this item, you can select the display
mode, the particulars relating to the automatic
transmission, and choose between the
following options:
“Single digit”
The right side of the display will show the
letter concerning the automatic transmission
gear selector (P,R,N or D) position. After
approximately two seconds, the letter will be
displayed in a central position.
“Full PRND”
(Default): The letters PRND will display on the
right side, the position assumed by the gear
selector will be highlighted in the display.
During the operation in sequential mode
(“AutoStick”), in place of the letter D, the gear
will be will be displayed.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In The Upper Left/Top Right
The information relating to the following can be
displayed:
External temperature
Ignition Button — If Equipped
Compass — If Equipped
Date (Month/Day)
Time (Hours/Minutes)
In the central area of the display, you can view
all of the information listed above as well as the
following:
Compass — If Equipped
Speed Display — If Equipped
Date (Day/Month/Year)
Time
Compass — If Equipped
Ignition Button — If Equipped
External Temp — If equipped
Menu Item
Distance Traveled A (Trip A)
Distance Traveled B (Trip B)
Restore Default Settings
Selecting this item, and you can reset and
restore the default settings.
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the
settings for the following:
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
Lights
Doors and Locks
NOTE:
Some items may be displayed and managed
through the Uconnect system.
Vehicles Equipped With Multi-functional Display
Reconfigurable:
The following menu/submenu items are
available in the cluster display.
“Vehicle Shut Off (If Equipped)”
By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can
turn off the engine from the instrument cluster.
This feature is available in the event of an
ignition switch failure, and will display
instructions for turning off the engine via the
instrument cluster display controls.
“Display”
By selecting the “Display,” you can access the
following setting:
Language: allows you to select the language
in which to display the information/warnings.
“Units Of Measure”
By selecting the item “Units of Measure,” you
can select the unit of measure to use for
displaying various magnitudes.
Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
“Clock & Date”
By selecting the item, “Clock & Date” you can
adjust the clock.
Possible options are:
Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
Set Format: adjust the time format “12h”
(12 hours) or “24h” (24 hours)
Set Date: adjust day/month/year
“Security”
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make
the following adjustments:
Speed Warning:
Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is
notified through a visual and acoustic
signaling (display of a message and a symbol
on the display).
When the speed warning is set, the icon
should remain visualized for the same dura-
tion time of the pop up. If the driver exceeded
the set speed, the icon should remain for
however long the vehicle is over the set
speed.
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning
“OFF” should you choose not to use this
feature.
Seat Belt Reminder:
This function is only viewable when the Seat
Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
Hill Start Assist:
Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start
Assist system.
Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or
disabled.
“Lights”
By selecting the item “Lights,” you can make the
following adjustments:
Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for head-
light shutoff after engine shutoff
Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of
headlight brightness
Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate
the daytime running lights
Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the
cornering lights (If Equipped)
Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of
interior ambient lights
Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate
greeting lights
“Doors & Locks”
By selecting the item “Doors & Locks,” you can
make the following adjustments:
Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the auto-
matic locking of the doors with the vehicle
moving
Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of
the doors when exiting the vehicle
Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction
indicators when closing the doors
Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate
the horn when pushing the LOCK button on
the key fob. The options are “Off,” “First
Press,” and “Second Press”
Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate
the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine
with the key fob
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the
driver door only on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the key fob
Passive Entry (If Equipped): activate the auto-
matic locking of the doors
“Compass”
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make
the following adjustments:
Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip computer is used to display information
on car operation when the key is turned to the
RUN position.
This function allows you to define two separate
trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car's
“complete trips” are monitored in an
independent manner.
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new
trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the OK
button on the steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the
figures relating to:
Distance Traveled
Average Consumption
Travel Time (driving time)
Quantities Displayed
Distance Traveled
Indicates the distance traveled by the start of
the new trip.
Average Consumption
Represents the average fuel consumption
since the start of the new trip.
Travel Time
Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various
parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and
begin a new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
“Manual” by pushing the OK button.
“Automatic” when the “distance” reaches the
value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when the
“time travel” reaches the value of 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes).
After each disconnection and reconnection
of the battery.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
All active telltales will display first, if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
ThisThis light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level
and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
cle checked immediately.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This light informs you of a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this light will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
liftgate is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a
failure of the oil pressure sensor. If
this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal when there is a fault detected
with the Active Speed Limiter.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating.”
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a
failure of the Audio System. Contact
an authorized dealership as soon as
possible.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy
road condition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to
drift out of its lane unintentionally
without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays
on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service. Refer to
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” in “Safety”
for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-
ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a
failure with the tow hook. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the
transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light
turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run
the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
turns off.
4WD Over Temperature Warning Light
The icon will appear on the
instrument panel display to indicate
overheating of the 4WD system. The
mode selected by the user will be
applied as soon as the system exits the
overheating condition.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on four-wheel
drive operation and proper use.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed.
Refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on four-wheel
drive operation and proper use.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is
a malfunction in one of the exterior
bulbs.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after
an accident has occurred, and the
system has shut the fuel off.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a
fuel cutoff failure. If this light
illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security alarm system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could
illuminate if a problem with the system is
detected. This condition will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
White Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are
not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is
light sensor failure. If this light
illuminates, have an authorized
dealer inspect it.
Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned
on, the speed warning telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
with a number matching the set
speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a
single chime will sound along with pop up
message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed
Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display, for further
nformation refer to “Instrument Cluster Display
Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your
nstrument Panel.”
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Indicator Lights
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the
automatic high beam headlights are
on.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed
control is set to the desired speed.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further
information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on. Refer
to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up
when the vehicles Hazard Warning
flasher switch has been pushed.
Park / Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on. Refer to “Exterior Lights” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Stop / Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
Gray Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control Ready/Canceled
Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control function is
ready (but not set), or canceled, by the
driver. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
99
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together
to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering Torque
(DST), and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) function
uses the integration of the ESC system with the
electric power steering to increase the safety
level of the whole car. In critical situations
(understeering, oversteering, braking with
different grip conditions), through the DST
function the ESC system controls the steering to
implement an additional torque contribution on
the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
maneuver to the driver. The coordinated action
of brakes and steering increases the safety and
car control feeling.
NOTE:
The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the
car.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers, and it will only intervene during
these types of maneuvers. It cannot prevent
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
in Safety for a complete explanation of the avail-
able ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions, and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabil-
ities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow
the instruction below.
There are three modes of active safety systems
present on the vehicle:
ESC On
Partial Off
Full Off
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4H Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when
operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also
the normal mode for operating a four-wheel
drive vehicle in 2WD or 4H Range. The ESC
system will be in “ESC On” mode whenever the
vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if
equipped) is shifted out of 4L Range. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to
“Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
information.
NOTE:
It is recommended to select the mode "Partial
Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons.
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4H Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in
deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises
the threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than what ESC
normally allows.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
ESC OFF Button
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” button and the ESC OFF
indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button
and the ESC OFF indicator light will turn off. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. Once the situa-
tion requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
“ESC OFF” button. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4H And
4L Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway
and off-road use when ESC stability features
could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. The “ESC OFF” button is located in
the lower switch bank above the climate control
panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and hold
the “ESC OFF” button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
five seconds, the ESC OFF indicator light will
illuminate and an “ESC OFF” message will
appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off
(except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section) until the vehicle reaches a
speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds over
40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically
switches to “Partial Off” mode, described
above. When the vehicle speed returns to less
than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will
return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF indicator
light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” button. This will restore the normal “ESC
On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended for
off-highway or off-road use.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
NOTE:
“Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC
in 4L Range. The ESC system will be in this
mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4L
range or the power transfer unit is shifted
into 4L Range.
The “ESC OFF” message will display and a
chime will sound when the gear selector is
moved from any position to the PARK (P)
position and then moved out of the PARK
position. This will occur even if the message
was cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the
activation of some driving modes provide partial
off or full off of some active safety systems in
order to optimize performance in specific
modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems will
be indicated by a light in the instrument cluster.
In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems
are partially disabled and put in place to ensure
maximum performance in the specific mode of
operation. However, you can reactivate them
completely at any time by pushing the ESC
button.
NOTE:
In 4L Range, the active safety systems are
completely bypassed in order to ensure
maximum off-road performance.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles/kilometers at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when Traction Control System is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light"
indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is in “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
The ESC OFF switch is located in the center
console.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4L Range.
Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted
using brake and throttle input.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is
on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range.
The driver’s door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain solid when HDC is enabled
or activated. This is the normal operating
condition for HDC.
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds
then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch when enable conditions have not
been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal. The system will release
brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, the HSA will work in REVERSE
gear and all forward gears. The system will
not activate if the transmission is in PARK.
Disabling and Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of
the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in
the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for further information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of
the trailer. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is
recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information. When TSC is
functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may
be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop
the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the
rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle,
10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at the
outside mirror and extends approximately 20 ft
(6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is
necessary to deactivate the BSM system
manually through the settings menu to avoid
a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the radar sensors located on the rear fascia
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
Rear Sensor Locations
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” in this section for further
information.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 1 mph (2 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be a related message on instrument cluster
display. If BSM system is off, this message will
be visualized every time the vehicle is restarted.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Blinded Sensor
In the case of a sensor that is blinded:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously
A instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
NOTE:
The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporarily
unavailable:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously
A instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
In the case of the system being completely
unavailable:
A chime will sound
A instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
NOTE:
Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the
forward looking sensors as well as the Elec-
tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the
probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide
a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the poten-
tial forward collision. If the driver reacts to
the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid
the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the
end of the intervention of automatic braking,
the engine could stall, unless the driver can
depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the
end of the intervention of automatic braking,
the transmission may remain in last gear
stored: therefore the vehicle could lurch
forward, once the brakes release a few seconds
later. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h),
the system may provide the maximum braking
possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
If the vehicle enters 4L Range, the FCW
system will be automatically deactivated.
The active braking is disabled when a trailer
is connected with a Mopar Trailer Towing
system. If the vehicle is equipped with an
aftermarket system, it is recommended that
the Active Braking is turned off manually.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active
Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you and enable the active braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking
will be available in case of a possible collision
Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only
possible with the vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is not kept in memory
from one ignition position to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will turn on when the
vehicle is restarted.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential colli-
sion. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
a collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
ing and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Changing FCW Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the
Uconnect system, you can change the
sensitivity of the system by choosing one of the
following three options: "Near", "Medium" or
"Far". Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The default option is "Medium". This setting
provides that the system notify the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is at a standard distance,
intermediate between the other two possible
settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far",
the system will warn the driver of a possible
accident with the vehicle in front when the latter
is at a greater distance, giving you the chance to
act on the brakes in a more limited and gradual
way. This setting gives the driver the maximum
possible time of reaction to prevent a possible
accident.
By changing the option to "Near", the system will
warn the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced
distance. This setting offers a reaction time to
the driver lower than the settings "Medium" and
"Far", in the case of a potential accident,
providing a more dynamic driving of the vehicle.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is
maintained in memory when the engine is
switched off.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads: “FCW Unavailable Service
Required”
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
“FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warning
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
and the system will deactivate.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path, this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. In
absence of visible obstructions on the bumper,
it could be necessary to wipe off the radar
directly on the surface, after having the radar
cover removed. It’s recommended that an
authorized dealer perform this operation.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
NOTE:
If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g.
more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
the radar sensor realigned at an authorized
dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector
is not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use
solvents or abrasive pastes.
The radar is equipped with a defrost system,
so in some climatic conditions it could reach
high temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds
after the engine has been turned off before
touching the sensor.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersec-
tion
The intervention of the system could be
unexpected or delayed. The driver must
therefore always pay particular attention, while
maintaining control of the vehicle to drive in
complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system
could detect the presence of a vehicle that is in
front of the vehicle, but that does not preside in
the same lane. In cases such as this, the system
might respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of
vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but
placed outside the field of action of the radar
sensor and could therefore not react in the
presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while
standing in the traffic lane of their vehicle and
inside the field of action of the radar sensor may
cause the intervention of the system.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming
Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
that crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an
oncoming intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” to turn
off.
The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Light off.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light”.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
TPMS information on your instrument
cluster.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver Module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light”
will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message will display in the instrument cluster,
an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Light off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, a chime will sound and the
“TPMS Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
and "Inflate to XX" messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
“TPMS Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound and the “TPMS Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full size
spare, the TPMS will update automatically
and the “TPMS Light” will turn off, as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver Module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors.
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light”
will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light” will no longer flash,
and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will
no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire
assembly has a tire pressure monitoring
sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Light” will turn on
upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a Tire Low
message, an "Inflate to XX" message and a
graphic showing the low tire pressure value
in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the
“TPMS Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the tire pressure value in the same
color as the other pressure values in place
of the different color low tire pressure value.
The instrument cluster will also display a
dedicated message to remind you to service
the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the “TPMS Light” will remain on and a
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value and an
"Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the “TPMS Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the “TPMS Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the “TPMS Light” will turn off and
the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing Winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To
deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and
the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle,
the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster display but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then turn off, and the instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message.
The instrument cluster will also display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to “Customer Assistance” for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Front Seat BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger to
buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is
active whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the respective Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn solid red and
remain red until the seat belt is buckled. The
respective Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
solid green once the seat belt is buckled. After
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
have buckled their seat belts all Seat Belt
Reminder Lights will turn off. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat
is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the respective Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain solid red until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will
begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
(Continued)
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
(Continued)
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK
position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert
you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
(Continued)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is
active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left
and right turn signal lights, located in the
instrument panel, may both be blinking and will
continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle
to the side of the road, you must follow the
system reset procedure.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a reset procedure step is not completed within
60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink
and the reset procedure must be performed
again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be com-
pleted within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call 1-888-327-4236.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
(Continued)
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop-
erly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
rectly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
— Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages
Per Seating Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or for-
ward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages
from the outboard seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location - Rear Outboard Seats
Passenger Side (Example Shown)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compat-
ible Child Restraint” for typical installation
instructions.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
tion with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
(Continued)
(Continued)
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas-
teners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre-
vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put
the gear selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing
the accelerator.
3. Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the
ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10-15
seconds before attempting to restart the
engine.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START mode and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run but will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, and
has not experienced an extended park
condition as identified in "Extended Park
Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in
RUN mode, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold
conditions an externally powered electric block
heater (if equipped) is required for the 1.3L
Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the
2.4L engine below -31°F (-35°C) and is
recommended for the 2.4L engine below -20°F
(-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while
starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will
inhibit engine cranking when the ambient
temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C) for the
1.3L Turbo engine, and -31°F (-35°C) for the
2.4L engine, and the oil temperature sensor
reading indicates an engine block heater has
not been used. The message “plug in engine
heater” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the ambient temperature is below
-4°F (-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off
as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at
the next cold start.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to
15 seconds, place the ignition in the OFF
mode, wait five seconds to allow the starter
to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight
attempts, allow the starter to cool for at
least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not con-
tinuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a
reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the engine
coolant temperature gauge starts to rise for
maximum performance.
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the ignition or push the START/STOP
button three times consecutively within a few
seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning off the car (cycle the ignition from the
RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power supply
to the accessories are maintained for a period
of three minutes.
NOTE:
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
window switches remain active for three
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump
to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut
off. Depending on the type of driving and the
amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to
10 minutes after the engine has been shut off
to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet
operation, it is normal to hear it running during
this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park
Brake System (EPB) that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that
make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect settings or
in “Safe Hold” conditions.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
EPB engages. Once the parking brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the EPB, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The
EPB can be applied even when the ignition is in
the OFF mode however, it can only be released
when the ignition is in the RUN mode.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
EPB will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is moved into PARK, or with a
manual transmission, when the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is
engaging.
The electric park brake will be automatically
released if the driver's seat belt is buckled (only
in case of automatic transmission) and driver's
intention to start (in forward or reverse
direction) is recognized by the system.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must
be in the RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
sound from the back of the car while the parking
brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once
the EPB is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a down-
hill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the EPB before placing the gear
selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. The EPB should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
If the clutch pedal is released at the same
time the gas pedal is pressed, the EPB will be
automatically released (manual transmis-
sions only).
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the EPB while the vehicle
is in motion, maintain upward pressure on the
EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The brake warning lamp could
illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not
available. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake sys-
tem malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the EPB, when
the vehicle reaches approximately 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning
lamp flashing. In this status some EPB
functionalities may be deactivated. In this
event, urgent service of the EPB system is
required. Do not rely on the EPB to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition is
in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled
and disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and
the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some cases,
with an automatic transmission, if the ignition is
cycled from ON/RUN to OFF and the gear
selector is not firmly locked in the PARK
position, EPB applies automatically even if Auto
Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system
that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is
in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system. Be sure the
parking brake is fully disengaged before driv-
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure
and a collision.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
For manual transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
The clutch pedal is not pressed.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is
open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
mode and back to RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
electric park brake system, this can only be
done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in park or neutral.
The EPB switch not activated.
The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is in the
RUN mode.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be
activated.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be
deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the
floor and put the gear selector to the desired
position (the diagram for the engagement of the
gears is displayed on the handle of the lever).
REVERSE Ring
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and simultaneously move the lever to
the left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting
from a standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
for fuel economy and performance, it should be
upshifted as listed in the recommended shift
speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed
for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling
a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds
may not apply.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the park-
ing brake fully applied. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on
a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged,
as this will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines
Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but
it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the trans-
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not
an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at
the right time provides better acceleration when
you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip, and the vehicle could
skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage
the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt
to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
depressed may result damage to the clutch
system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal depressed could result in clutch
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
(Continued)
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
— IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art,
fuel efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster display. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear selector
and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK, or to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds
(refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System" in this section). Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or down-
shift at too high of a vehicle speed, these con-
ditions may cause the engine to overspeed if
too low of a gear is selected and the clutch
pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and
the transmission can result from skipping a
gear while downshifting or downshifting at
too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch
pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released).
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the AutoStick shift control (refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward
(-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3,
etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector Lock Button
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of FCA current
and future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize
the customer’s driving experience and fuel
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
(Continued)
(Continued)
economy. By design, some vehicle and
drive-line combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) by locking the transmission. The engine
can be started in this range. Never attempt to
use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the EPB when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the EPB.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important
when the engine is cold.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the park brake. Always apply the
park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally (or
stopped) and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, press the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly move
the gear selector all the way forward until it
stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
electric park brake and shift the transmission
into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running or the propul-
sion system is active. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the park brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light”
may illuminate and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th
or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission
fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to
a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing and
many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position), it can be
moved forward and rearward. This allows the
driver to manually select the transmission gear
being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL can cause severe transmission dam-
age. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis-
abled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine over-
speed.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on
model) when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear
can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap
the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not
shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically
monitored for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in neutral. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to deter-
mine if the problem could recur. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. Also, the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the RUN mode (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before
pushing the button on the gear selector to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive
Low (4WD Low)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is
shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater
the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and
performance characteristics.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
4WD LOCK
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
power transfer unit.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
4WD LOCK Button
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving
mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
Models Only)
4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD Low, please follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN
mode or with the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and push the
button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster
will display the message "4WD LOW" once the
shift is complete.
NOTE:
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
The instrument cluster display will illuminate
the "4WD Low" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission shifted
into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic and
can be used on and off-road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverability
and acceleration improvement compared to
a vehicle with two-wheel drive. This mode
also reduces fuel consumption, since it
allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather. It's
used on and off-road and on surfaces with
poor traction, such as roads covered with
snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmis-
sion will use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage, except for in 4WD LOW (Trailhawk
models only).
SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as sandy bottoms.
The transmission is set to provide maximum
traction. This mode allows more wheel spin
and higher shift points to help motor through
loose areas.
MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets
the vehicle to maximize traction and allow
the highest steering capacity for off-road
surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Trailhawk package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
System” in “Safety” for further information.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Active Grille
Shutters, an automatic system with mobile
flaps applied in front of the cooling module,
whose automatic opening/closing movement
aims at improving the vehicle aerodynamic
efficiency and thus reducing consumption while
ensuring optimal engine operating temperature
conditions.
When a greater air flow is required for cooling
(e.g. when driving in urban traffic) the flaps
open, whereas when temperature is low or air
flow is enough (example when driving on
highways), the flaps close.
If there is a failure detected, the instrument
panel will illuminate the engine check/
malfunction indicator warning light.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING”
OR “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically restart the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure with vehicle in DRIVE position.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out
of DRIVE except in the PARK and NEUTRAL
position.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the electric park brake may require
a manual release (depress brake pedal and
push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to the ON mode every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control func-
tions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/
off button and resetting the desired vehicle
set speed.
The Speed Control function will not work in
4WD Low Range.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Varying The Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the cruise
control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
System.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning System.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Distance Setting Decrease
7 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
8 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys-
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “Adaptive Cruise Control Over-
ride” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
Manual transmission is not in a forward gear
(if equipped).
Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch
pressed down for a fixed amount of time (if
equipped).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the
RES button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for pre-
vailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-
low these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) button, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
If equipped with a manual transmission, it is
possible to make gear changes during the
normal operation of ACC that will allow the
driver to engage the appropriate gear with
respect to the set speed in order to keep the
feature activated. It is canceled when the
clutch pedal is held down, or when placing
the gearbox in NEUTRAL for a certain
maximum time.
If equipped with an automatic transmission,
ACC systems could automatically downshift
to a lower gear when driving downhill or
during accelerations. Therefore, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
This is normal and necessary to maintain the
set speed. When driving uphill and downhill,
the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer). Once the
longest setting is reached, if the button is
pushed again it will be set to the shortest
setting available.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the
set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to “Activating
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in this
chapter).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will appear in
the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following shows in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
(located on the steering wheel) and the
following will read in the instrument cluster
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warning
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning is active, Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For addi-
tional information refer to “Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the fascia/
bumper.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not use solvents or abrasive pastes. The
radar is equipped with a defrost system, so in
some climatic conditions it could reach high
temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds after
the engine has been placed in the OFF mode
before touching the sensor.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure
or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function when reactivated.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g.
more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector
is not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” warning will display to indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at your authorized dealer.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Frontal Camera Service
Required”, “Cruise Control Service Required”,
or “Cruise Control Temporarily Unavailable",
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the
accelerator. Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC on and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH/km/h) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
speed control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
Manual transmission is not in a forward gear
(if equipped).
Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch
pressed down (if equipped).
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the
rear fascia and a detected obstacle when
backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the RUN
position.
Rear ParkSense can be active only when the
gear selector is in REVERSE.
Rear ParkSense Sensors
The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Parking Sensors
Chime
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the
case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an
acoustic signal that varies with the distance of
the obstacle from the fascia/bumper is
activated.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
Increases as the distance between vehicle
and object decreases.
Becomes continuous when the distance that
separates the vehicle from the obstacle is
less than approximately 12 inches (30 cm),
while terminates immediately if the distance
to the obstacle increases.
Remains constant if the distance between
vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If
this situation occurs for the external sensors,
the signal is stopped after approximately
three seconds to avoid, for example, activa-
tion in case of maneuver along a wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the
volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on, is
automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense.
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, only the
obstacle with the shortest distance is taken into
account.
Instrument Cluster Display
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument
cluster only if you have selected "Sound and
Display" within the "Safety And Driving
Assistance" menu of the Uconnect system.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle
when the display shows only a flashing arc and
the chime becomes continuous.
The color on the display depends on the
distance and location of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster display will show a
message such as “PARKSENSE DISABLED” for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The Rear ParkSense switch LED turns on when
the system is disabled by pressing the switch,
as well as in case of failure or temporary
disabling conditions. The Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the Rear
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
Rear ParkSense will remember the previous
state when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
CAUTION!
After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear Park-
Sense remains in this setting until the next
ignition cycle, even in the case of changing
the setting of starting RUN to OFF and then
again in RUN.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the rear sensors is
automatically deactivated when the trailer’s
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow
hook socket. In this situation, the ParkSense
switch LED turns on.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated
when the trailer’s cable plug is removed.
Service The Rear ParkSense System
During vehicle start up, when the Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display a message such as “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED”. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will show a message
such as "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" for approximately five
seconds. Under this condition, Rear ParkSense
will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to
keep the Rear ParkSense system operating
properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Rear
ParkSense.
Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The Rear ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper while driving the
vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period,
it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch and
hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of
view. The filtering operation must be performed
only by an authorized dealer.
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
obstacle is detected, as long as the system is
on. When the gear selector shifted to NEUTRAL
(or PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the
system becomes inactive. When the vehicle is
moving forward, the system will remain active
until the vehicle speed remains below
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Reducing the
speed approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h),
the system will come back active. When the
vehicle is moving in REVERSE, the system will
remain active as long as the speed remains
below the maximum operating speed of 7 mph
(11 km/h). When the maximum speed limit is
exceeded, the system is disabled and the
ParkSense switch LED with illuminate. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed reduces below approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE:
For further information on Active Park Assist,
refer to the “ParkSense Active Park Assist
System” section.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
39 inches (100 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
audible chime will increase as the object gets
closer to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the audible chime will increase
as the object gets closer to the vehicle.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
59 inches
(150 cm)
59–52 inches
(150-130 cm)
52-41 inches
(130-105 cm)
41-34 inches
(105-85 cm)
34-24 inches
(85-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audible
tone.
Front Park Assist
The ParkSense warning screen will be displayed
when the gear selector is in the DRIVE position
and an obstacle is detected, as long as the
vehicle speed is below approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h).
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front
region, the display will show a single arc in the
center front region. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible
chime will increase as the object gets close to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the audible chime will increase
as the object gets close to the vehicle.
No Tone/Solid Arc
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single, 1/2 sec-
ond, audible
chime is heard.
Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle. Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 39 inches
(100 cm)
39-32 inches
(100-80 cm)
32-24 inches
(80-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audible
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
and the vehicle is stationary. If the obstacle has
been detected within less than 12 inches
(30 cm), then the Parksense will not turn off the
Front Park Assist audible alert.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Customer-Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime
volume settings will not be accessible from the
instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display will show the
“ParkSense Disabled” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the
system is disabled by pushing the switch, as
well as in case of failure or temporary disabling
conditions. The ParkSense switch LED will be
off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Audible Alert Chime None None None
Audible chime
increases as the object
gets close to the
vehicle.
Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes
WARNING ALERTS
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
When the ParkSense System has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will actuate a single chime, and it will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinter-
preting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving.
The operation of the rear sensors is automat-
ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
socket, while the front sensors stay active
and can provide acoustic and visual warn-
ings. The rear sensors are automatically reac-
tivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System
The Side Distance Warning system has the
function of detecting the presence of side
obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and where provided, with visual
indications on the instrument panel display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
on when the system is sounding an audible
tone.
Activation — Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a
short distance and if the vehicle speed is
between 0 and 11 mph (0 and 18 km/h). The
system can be activated/deactivated via the
"Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If the
ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense Hard switch then the Side Distance
Warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance
Warning feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in
the case of a failure of the Side Distance
Warning system sensors. Free the bumpers of
any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
“SDW Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system
is not available. The failed operation of the
system might be due to the insufficient voltage
from the battery or other failures on the
electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the electrical
system checked.
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when
the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle's tow hook socket. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's
cable plug is removed.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12–65 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Audible chime
increases as
the objects
within the
vehicle’s path
get close to
the vehicle.
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the
performance of the Side Distance Warning
System:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message
to appear in the instrument cluster display
will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer
may interfere with the correct operation of
the parking sensors. Before using the Park-
Sense system, it is recommended to remove
the removable tow hook ball assembly and
any attachments from the vehicle when it is
not used for towing operations. If you wish to
leave the tow hook fitted without towing a
trailer, it is advisable to contact your autho-
rized dealer for the ParkSense system
update operations because the tow hook
could be detected as an obstacle by the
central sensors.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during Parallel,
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions,
and controlling the steering wheel. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined
as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or
passenger side), as well as exiting a parallel
parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch once (LED
turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
The parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Touching the steering wheel during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park
Assist switch.
Driver's door is opened.
Rear liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Brake
System intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum number of shifts between
DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within the maximum amount of
shifts, the system will cancel and the instru-
ment cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If
the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press or to Switch Maneuver” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
You may switch to perpendicular parking or
Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow
buttons on the left side of the steering wheel
can be used to switch parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
will be instructed to place the gear selector into
the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The Active ParkSense System will allow a
maximum amount of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE, and then the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position.
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" message will be momentarily
displayed. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press or to Switch Maneuver” message
will show in the instrument cluster display. The
arrow buttons on the left side of the steering
wheel can be used to switch parking
maneuvers. You may switch to parallel parking,
or Parallel Park Exit, if you desire. Refer to
“Exiting The Parking Space” in this section for
more information.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
will be instructed to place the gear selector into
the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The Active ParkSense System will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
(Continued)
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
position. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" message will be momentarily
displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing par-
allel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up and
moving forward. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Exiting The Parking Space
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense hard switch and then use the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the
Parallel Park Exit feature. After the selection,
the system activates and warns the driver on
the instrument cluster display about the
operations that have to be carried out to
perform the maneuver correctly.
NOTE:
The following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will exit the parking space:
The system must detect an obstacle within
16 - 35 inches (40 - 90 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper.
The system must detect an obstacle within
16 - 59 inches (40 - 150 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper.
If the detected obstacles are too close, or too
far from the vehicle (not detected by the
sensors), then the maneuver is cancelled and
the message “Active ParkSense Cancelled
Complete Maneuver Manually” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
If the maneuver is cancelled, it may be possible
to reposition the vehicle inside the parking
space and activate the feature again.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the right and left arrow buttons on the
steering wheel to select between parallel or
perpendicular parking mode. Then use the
direction indicators (turn signals) to choose the
direction that you want to perform the
maneuver.
To Exit Space Use Turn Signal And Shift To Reverse —
Press Left Or Right to Switch Maneuver
During the maneuver, the system instructs the
driver to shift to REVERSE. Select the direction
indicator in the direction you want to exit. Let go
of the steering wheel and use the brake or
accelerator as instructed, while the system
handles the steering automatically for exiting
the parking space. If the driver continues to
carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the
steering wheel during the exit maneuver
(touching or holding the steering wheel to
prevent its movement), the maneuver will be
interrupted.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Check Surroundings — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Stop
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Stop
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the
system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
Active ParkSense Complete Check Surroundings
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Important Information
If the sensors undergo impact which alters
their position, the system operation could be
greatly affected.
The sensors reach top performance after the
vehicle has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due
to the dynamic tire circumference calcula-
tions used for parking.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle
(echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for
example while washing the vehicle or in the
case of rain, strong wind, and hail.
The sensors may not detect objects of a
particular shape or made from particular
materials (very thin poles, trailer beams,
panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking posts,
pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles,
etc.). Always take great care to check that the
vehicle and its path are actually compatible
with the parking place identified by the
system.
The use of wheels and tires that are different
size to the original equipment could affect
the operation of the system.
The operation of the rear sensors is automat-
ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
socket, while the front sensors stay active
and can provide acoustic and visual warn-
ings. The rear sensors are automatically reac-
tivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
In "Search in progress" mode, the system
could incorrectly identify a parking place to
carry out the maneuver (e.g. by a junction,
driveways, roads crossing the direction of
travel, etc.).
In the case of parking maneuvers on roads
on a slope, the performance of the system
could be inferior and it may deactivate.
If a parking maneuver is being carried out
between two parked vehicles alongside the
pavement, the system may cause the vehicle
to mount the pavement.
Some maneuvers at very tight bends might
be impossible to be carried out.
Take great care to ensure that conditions do
not change during the parking maneuver
(e.g. if there are persons and/or animals in
the parking place, moving vehicles, etc.) and
intervene immediately if necessary.
During parking maneuvers, pay attention to
vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction. Always abide by the law and road
regulations.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Correct system operation is not guaranteed if
snow chains or the space-saver wheel are
fitted.
The function only informs the driver about the
last appropriate parking place (parallel or
perpendicular) detected by the parking
sensors.
Some messages displayed are accompanied
by acoustic warnings.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides
an audible warning to the driver when the
driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack.
To turn the LaneSense system on,
push the LaneSense button (LED
turns off). A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN
position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and the
left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time, torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid
yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of your vehicle's rear
surroundings when the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The camera is located above the
rear license plate.
Parking Camera
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, a
touchscreen "X" button is overlapped to the
camera image in order to disable the
visualization earlier than 10 seconds.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
(Continued)
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed
at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and
closes automatically upon insertion/extraction
of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it
prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using the Rear Back
Up Camera to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using the Rear Back Up
Camera.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
1. Open the door, by pushing and releasing
on the indentation point indicated by the
arrow.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and
proceed with filling the fuel tank.
Filling Procedure
3. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10
seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside of
the tank.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then
close the door.
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
Open the liftgate and remove the emergency
fuel fill funnel located in the cargo area.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel – If Equipped With Full Size
Spare Tire
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
(Continued)
Open the fuel door.
Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and
close the door.
Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
cargo area.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
WARNING!
Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of
the filler neck other than is provided on the
car.
The use of objects/plugs do not comply
with the vehicle and may cause pressure
increases inside the tank, creating
dangerous conditions.
Do not approach the neck of the tank with
open flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme
fire hazard. Also, avoid close contact with
the filler pipe with your face, do not inhale
harmful vapors.
Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity
of the pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible
risk of fire.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry
standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
WARNING! (Continued)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
1.3L Turbo 2,000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L 2,000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Serving And Maintenance” for
proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the frame or hook
retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Serving And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection
procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Serving And Mainte-
nance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have a collision.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the
transmission in PARK. Turn the engine off.
Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not
start the engine.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake
pedal.
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a
flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels
are OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
(refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in this section for
further details). This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or
sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine,
transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear
Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four Wheel
Drive” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD
LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE. Back
slowly down the hill allowing the compression
braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill
- drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the front wheels
slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill
Descent Control if equipped (refer to "Electronic
Brake Control System" in “Safety” for further
information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control
the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEU-
TRAL using only the brake.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
5
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the switch bank below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in OFF mode.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance (if equipped) – If you get
a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST
button and you’ll be connected to someone
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (if
equipped) – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM
Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care (if equipped) – Total
support for all other vehicle issues.
UConnect Care (if quipped) – Total support
for all the UConnect feature.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED lights located on the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. The SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a
SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
NOTE:
The SOS Call function may not be available for
the first minute after the vehicle is started
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located on the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be
illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active.
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
Before you replace a bulb, check the
contacts to be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and
wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the
correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not func-
tioning, check that the fuse is intact.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Turn Indicator PY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED Headlamps) PY24W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove
the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
clockwise then pull outwards.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
CAUTION!
During bulb replacement do not touch the
new glass bulb with your fingers. Oil contami-
nation will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp
bulb connector and remove the bulb and
socket.
Headlamp Bulb Connector
Headlamp Bulb
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure
it is properly locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
LED Headlamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog
Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access
door.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/
Fog Light Access
3. Remove the electrical connector.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
only with the engine off. Also make sure that
the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of
burns.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Releasing the two tabs, and remove the
bulb and bulb socket from the housing.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
5. Install the new bulb and socket into the
housing, and engage the two tabs, making
sure that it is properly locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access
door.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/
Fog Light Access
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
Fog Light Assembly
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
1 — Bulb Socket
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
1 — Bulb Socket
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Bulb
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
LED Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Side Indicators
Front Side Indicators
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Operating from inside the engine
compartment using a suitable tool release
the retaining clip.
Lamp Retaining Clip
2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward
the outside.
Lamp Assembly
3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing
the tab then disconnect the electrical
connector.
Electrical Connector
4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb
socket from the lamp assembly, and
remove it.
Bulb Socket
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Bulb
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Insert the new bulb in the socket.
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp
assembly by turning it clockwise, making
sure it is locked into place.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car,
making sure it is locked into place.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –
(If Equipped)
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear
view mirror.
Mirror Cap
Removing the mirror cap
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as
shown.
Transparent Lens
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
transparent lens assembly by rotating the
socket counterclockwise.
Transparent Lens Assembly
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline.
For the replacement of the lamp it is recom-
mended that you contact an authorized
dealer.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by
pulling the bulb straight out.
Bulb And Socket Assembly
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
locked into place.
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent
lens assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view
mirror, making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Position lights
Stop lights
Direction indicator
REVERSE lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as
shown.
Trim Panel Door
3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector
1 — Bulb
2 — Bulb Socket
1 — Electrical Connector
2 — Fastener
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward
the outside as shown.
Tail Lamp Removal
6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear
tail lamp holder.
Rear Lamp Assembly
7. Replace the bulb as necessary.
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear
tail lamp housing, tightening the screws.
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car.
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and
reconnect the electrical connector.
12. Reinstall the door making sure it locked into
place.
13. Finally close the liftgate.
LED Rear Tail Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lights – If Equipped With LED Tail
Lamps
1. Use a suitable tool to remove the screws
and remove the access door.
Reverse Light Access
1 — Mounting Screws
1 — Tail Light
2 — Reverse Bulb
3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
1 — Screw
2 — Screw
3 — Access Door
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
2. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
Reverse Light Assembly
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access door.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see an
authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license
plate lens.
License Plate Light Location
License Plate Light
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side
contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they
are properly locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE:
If removing the license plate lens using a screw-
driver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a cloth so no damage is done to the lenses
or the vehicle paint.
1 — Bulb
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light as shown.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing
as shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of
bulb housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they
are properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure
that it is properly locked.
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the
visor mirror light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is properly locked
between the contacts.
Visor
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp
assembly at both the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Rear Dome Light Housing
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Dome Light — MY SKY
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown
remove the dome light.
Retractable Roof Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the
side contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the luggage compartment and
remove the dome light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct
position.
WARNING!
Before proceeding with the replacement of
the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are
cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
Modifications or repair of the electrical
system performed incorrectly and without
taking into account the technical character-
istics can cause malfunctions with the risk
of fire.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/
melt.
Also please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers
located in the engine compartment, under the
instrument panel and on the inside of the left
side cargo trim panel.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure,
in the event of breakage be careful of the
projection of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by
touching only the metallic part. If the trans-
parent bulb is in contact with the fingers,
reduces the intensity of the emitted light
and you can also affect the life of the lamp.
In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and
allow to dry.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located
on the left side of the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
Slowly release the screw.
Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
slide completely from top to bottom.
Fully depress the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied.
Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – –
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution
Unit
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06
20 Amp Yellow – 2.4L
Engine
70 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
– – Engine Cooling Fan
F07 50 Amp Red – 2.4L Engine – – Engine Cooling Fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – –
5 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
25 Amp Clear – 2.4L Engine
Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – –
15 Amp Blue – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
WCAC Pump/Active Grille Shutters
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic
Transmission
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F17 – –
30 Amp Green – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
15 Amp Blue – 2.4L Engine
Supply Primary Loads
F18 – – 5 Amp Tan
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) 2.4L – If
Equipped
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22
– –
10 Amp Red – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
20 Amp Yellow – 2.4L
Engine
Power Control Module Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If Equipped
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmis-
sion
F82 – –
20 Amp Yellow – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
Power Control Module Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the
steering column at the bottom of the instrument
panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized
dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) 1.3L – If
Equipped
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear Ceiling Lights (With
Sunroof), E-Call, SGW
F37 10 Amp Red
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Brake
Pedal Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F42 7.5 Amp Brown
Power Under Lock and Key, Brake Control Electronics Module, Electric
Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Supply ParkSense, SGW, Mirror, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC Sys-
tem, S&S Inhibition Command, Blind Spot, Rain/Light Sensor, Humidity Sensor
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Air Conditioning, Lane Departure Warning, Terrain Selector, Backup Lights Switch
(MT), Trailer Tow Module, Compass Module, Rear View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Fuse Access Door
The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse
holder No. 1 and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped
with trailer towing) are located closest to the
rear of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
Fuse Holder No. 1
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun visor of the retractable roof.
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter
F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Fuse Holder No. 2
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment if equipped, inside a
special container.
Jack And Tools Location
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger
Side)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
Jack And Tools
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire.
4. Remove the chocks.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P)
(automatic transmission) or REVERSE (R)
(manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chocks
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the driver’s front
tire, chock the passenger’s rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel
bolt wrench to pry the center cap off
carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking location is indicated by a stamped
arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
compact spare tire or a limited — use spare
tire. For further information refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance”.
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications” for the proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor-
rectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and
flat tire.
Properly Stowed Tire
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
the “Technical Specifications” section for
the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools back
in the proper storage location. Release the
Electric Park Brake before driving the
vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all wheel bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage
compartment inside a storage container.
Located inside the container are a screwdriver
and the emergency fuel funnel. To access the
Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the
load floor.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit
located in the rear storage compartment inside
the storage container.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the
vehicle, take it out from the bag and place
it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear
flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power
outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to
the “I” position. The electric compressor will
be turned on, sealant and air will inflate the
tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure
should be reached within 20 minutes. If the
pressure has not been reached turn off and
remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehi-
cle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to
better distribute the sealant inside the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and
repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been
reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly
distribute the sealant inside the tire. After
10 minutes, stop and check the tire pres-
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Warning Label
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom Side Of Tire
Service Kit)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
(Continued)
(Continued)
sure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),
do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too
damaged, and contact the nearest autho-
rized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
repeat the inflation process to reach the
correct tire pressure and continue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle
and place it on the dashboard as a reminder
to the driver that the tire has been treated
with Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled care-
fully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing The Sealant
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira-
tion date at an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Positive Battery Post
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special com-
partment, away from sources of heat. Failure
to follow this WARNING may result in sealant
canister rupture and serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post.
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P)
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown)
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY — IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an
emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
Can Refueling” procedure. Refer to “Adding
Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
tery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot
assembly from the bezel.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access
hole (at the right front corner of the gear
selector assembly), and push and hold the
override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Location
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the
bezel.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND gear (2) and REVERSE (R) (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the
vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the “ESC
OFF” switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
NOTE:
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle,
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is
unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in
this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
can be moved.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one
end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hook Locations
Rear Tow Hook Location
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the drive-
train will result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
power transfer unit will occur if a front or
rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without opening the door. During towing
remember that not having the aid of the power
brakes and the electromechanical power
steering, greater force is needed in applying the
brakes and steering of the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-
cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
279
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 1
year or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle
time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill
as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace the Uconnect box (telematic box) bat-
tery (if equipped).
1
• • •
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure,
if necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration
date (if equipped).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps,
direction indicators, hazard warning lights, lug-
gage compartment, passenger compartment,
glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer,
engine coolant, etc.).
2
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check engine control system operation (via diag-
nostic tool).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust
- fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.).
• • • • • • • •
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade posi-
tion/wear.
• • • • • • • •
Check operation of windshield washer system
and adjust jets if necessary.
• • • • • • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks
and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
• • • • • • •
Visually check the condition and wear of the
front and rear brakes.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV joints
and replace if necessary.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect the condition of the accessory
drive belt.
3
• • •
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt. • •
Inspect and replace, if required, front end acces-
sory drive belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley.
3
• •
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. •
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.
4
5
6
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L Turbo Engine)
7
• • •
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine)
7
•
Replace engine air filter.
8
• • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years.
9
• • • • • • •
Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○
Change the manual transmission fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the following: trailer tow-
ing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• •
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
• •
1. The Uconnect box (telematic box) battery replacement has to be done every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damage.
3. The maximum mileage is 75,000 miles (120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every six years, regardless of distance traveled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 37,500 miles (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every four years regardless
of the mileage.
4. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km).
5. Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damage.
6. If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service operation
after a short time.
7. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further informa-tion).
Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
8. The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
9. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L Turbo Engine
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Battery 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
4 — Battery 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation — 1.3L
Turbo Engine
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the
cap with arrow on the engine cover.
Oil Cap
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
Cooling System
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located
in the engine compartment, and the fluid level
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further
information.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
Pressure Washing
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended. Pre-
cautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pres-
sures generated by these machines is such
that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.3L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
for turbocharged engines under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer
recommends synthetic engine oils that are API
Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-13340.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends 0W-20 engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.3L Turbo
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS synthetic engine oil
approved to FCA Material Standard MS-13340
such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
NOTE:
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to the Warranty
Information Book for further warranty infor-
mation.
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys-
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi-
tioning system as the chemicals can damage
your air conditioning components. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to
be placed in a position that allows the wiper
blades to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
wipers must be in the Park position before
placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two
minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP/
OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the
Service Position command (antipanic) must be
active for at least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated
several times to bring the blades into the
desired position, up to a maximum of three
times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy
is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN posi-
tion.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minutes timer has expired after turning
the ignition OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate
glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper
blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap
the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the
wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper
arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until it
snaps into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
Cooling System Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services,
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level
should be checked when the pads are replaced.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid
to both the brake system and the clutch release
system. The two systems are separated in the
reservoir, and a leak in one system will not
affect the other system. The manual transmis-
sion clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle.
If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake
system does not indicate any leaks or other
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
problems, it may be a result of a leak in the
hydraulic clutch release system. See an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the
“Technical Specifications” section for further
information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch
(4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid
changes are not necessary unless lubricant has
become contaminated with water.
NOTE:
If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair
its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake
fluids may damage the clutch system result-
ing in loss of clutch function and the ability to
shift the transmission.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may
be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-
mission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-
mission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Tire Terminology And Definitions
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehi-
cle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
EXAMPLE:
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s load-
ing capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold
tire inflation pressures.
Term Definition
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering
the valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use tem-
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the lim-
ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains And Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on front tires only.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
(Continued)
Due to limited clearance, the following trac-
tion devices are recommended:
All Models:
The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with
the use of 215/65R16 tires only. Chain front
tires ONLY. All other size tires are NOT chain-
able.
No other tire sizes can be chained.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
CAUTION!
Use on front tires ONLY.
Damage may result if tire chains or traction
devices are used with original equipment
size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the
following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown
in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and cir-
cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the power
transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more
than a month, observe the following
precautions:
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the
battery post and be sure that the battery is
fully charged. During storage check battery
charge quarterly.
If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge
every thirty days.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the glass.
Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted
surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+50 kPa) higher than recommended on the
tire placard and check it periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling system.
Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary
for two weeks or more, idle the engine for
approximately five minutes with the air condi-
tioning system on and high fan speed. This
will ensure a proper lubrication of the system,
thus minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the vehicle is put back
into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start
Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer
to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative
terminals to the battery, wait at least a min-
ute with ignition switch in the OFF position
and close the drivers door. When reconnect-
ing the positive and negative terminals to the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the drivers door is closed.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur-
poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if
used in closed areas they may cause respira-
tory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
semble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac-
tor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
stery may result.
7
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
stamped on a plate located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel cover, which is
visible from outside the car through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine OFF) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Wheel Bolt
Torque
**Wheel Bolt
Size
Wheel Bolt
Socket Size
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 325
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that
the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.3L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2
Method.
The use of a 91 or higher octane “premium”
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to
optimal performance. This increase in
performance is most noticeable in hot weather
or other heavier load conditions, such as
towing.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane
rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
8
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid
propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha-
nol, or gasoline containing more than 15%
ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communi-
cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% etha-
nol (E-15).
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 327
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion, and stability additives
are recommended. Using gasolines that have
these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi-
cle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
8
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 329
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo / 2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo Engine (SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS Synthetic, API Certified) 4.8 Quarts 4.5 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula)
8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula)
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meet-
ing the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.3L Turbo Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn-
zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.3L Turbo Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0–15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, Up To 85% Ethanol.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 331
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Trans-
mission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not avail-
able, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.
8
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to the
“Connected Services — If Equipped” section
within this chapter or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the settings menu screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is complete, press the X/Done
icon on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature.
Touchscreen Beep Yes No
Voice Settings Voice Response Length Show Command List
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km or km/L), “Distance” (mi or km), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Pressure”
(kPa or bar) units of measurement independently.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be
at before the system will warn you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)
— If Equipped
Off Sound Only Sound and Brake
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply
the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible
lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Electric Park Brake Service Mode Yes No
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system,
to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium sensitivity Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights
turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If
Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Cornering Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated
in the fog light) will illuminate on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Interior Ambient Lights + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are
below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow But-
ton
Down Arrow But-
ton
Left Arrow But-
ton
Right Arrow But-
ton
Center C Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect
Modes” section.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the settings menu screen. In this mode,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one setting can be selected on the touch-
screen at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is complete, either press the
Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ACC position.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4 system, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
After pressing the Custom button with Units on the touchscreen, you may select from the following menu items:
Voice — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi, and Temperature is set on °F. When
Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km, Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Distance — If Equipped mi km
Fuel Consumption — If
Equipped
MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Pressure — If Equipped psi kPa bar
Temperature — If Equipped °C °F
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And Format
12 hour 24 hour
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) - +
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the + and - buttons.
Sync Date — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitiv-
ity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning Volume Low Med
High
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brake Service Yes No
Auto Park Brake On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lighting — If Equipped + -
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels.
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the head-
lights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensitivity setting, press the 1, 2, or 3 button on the touchscreen to select
your desired Headlight Sensitivity level.
Headlight Off Delays — If Equipped 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Cornering Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will
illuminate on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Remote Door Unlock — If Equipped Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock
button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once.
If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C).
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay — If Equipped + –
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
Auto-On Radio — If Equipped On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door On Off
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset On Off
AutoPlay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When activated, the “AutoPlay” setting automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones and Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect
Modes” section.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
SXM Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings
button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Settings
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Settings button to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as
Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date,
Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirror &
Wipers, Brakes — If Equipped, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®,
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped, and Reset.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is complete, either press the
Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or press the X button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme List of Themes
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on
the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Units — If Equipped US
Metric
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Timeout — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If Equipped On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display
as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster —
If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display.
The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:
After pressing the Custom button with “Units” on the touchscreen, you may select from the following menu items:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi, and Temperature is set on °F. When
Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km, Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed — If Equipped MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °C °F
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM FM
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Set Date in Cluster (MM/DD/YY) + -
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle, and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning Sensitiv-
ity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights + Chime
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
Mirror & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system
is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Side Distance Warning — If
Equipped
Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking if you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lighting — If Equipped + -
Headlight Off Delay 0 30 60 90
Headlight Illumination on Approach 0 30 60 90
Headlights with Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Auto High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Dip — If Equipped On Off
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
MULTIMEDIA 365
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Lock Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Yes No
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
Yes No
Sound Horn With Lock — If
Equipped
Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
Yes No
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
Passive Entry — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-on Dr Heat Seat & Steering
Wheel — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are
below 40°F (4.4°C).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped On Off
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
MULTIMEDIA 367
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined Call, Text, or Both, to any incoming call or text before sending it directly
to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Auto Reply Text Call Both
Auto Reply Message Default Custom
Customize Auto Reply Message Customize Message
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Devices” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect Modes” section.
Smartphone Projection Manager List Of Connected Phones
NOTE:
Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives you the option to determine which phone
will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto™).
Smartphone Device Mirroring — If
Equipped
On Off
Enable Android Auto™ — If
Equipped
On Off
Autoshow Display Upon Connec-
tion — If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
MULTIMEDIA 369
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online. SiriusXM Travel Link® is a separate subscription.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Modem Reset — If Equipped Yes Cancel
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
MULTIMEDIA 371
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
Identifying Your Radio
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Radio Button
2 — Compass Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — More Button
5 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
6 — Screen Off Button
7 — Mute Button
8 — Volume and On/Off
9 — Phone Button
10 — Media Button
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
9 — Screen Off Button
10 — Mute Button
11 — Volume and On/Off
1 — Radio/Media Button
2 — Climate Button
3 — Apps Button
4 — Controls Button
5 — Navigation Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
9 — Screen Off Button
10 — Mute Button
11 — Volume and On/Off
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources.
Refer to “Uconnect Modes” in this section for further information.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system.
Refer to “Uconnect Modes” in this section for further information.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section for further information.
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the
screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or
tune a radio station.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button to turn the screen on or off.
Mute
Push the Mute button to turn off the audio of the radio system. Press it
again to turn the audio back on.
Volume and On/Off
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume On/Off but-
ton to turn the system on and off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
MULTIMEDIA 373
Your Uconnect System may be equipped with
Connected Services. Refer to “Connected
Services — If Equipped” for information on
activation, mobile app functionality, and
available features.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
Feature Description
Controls
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific feature like heated
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions.
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Feature Description
Nav (Navigation)
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s
built-in navigation software.
Refer to “Navigation” in this section for further information.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Safety And General Information
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
MULTIMEDIA 375
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
TBM2 General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
TMB2 devices equipped in this vehicle:
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA02SN
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the device must be installed and
operated to provide a separation distance of at
least 20 cm from all persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be
installed and operated with minimum distance
20 cm between the radiator and your body.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 MULTIMEDIA
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un
minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source
de rayonnement et votre corps
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
UCONNECT MODES
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The remote sound system controls are located
at the rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind
the wheel to access the switches.
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center that controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button changes the source
(AM, FM, SXM, Bluetooth®, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once will go to the beginning of the current
track, or to the beginning of the previous track if
it is within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
MULTIMEDIA 377
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Tune
7 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
8 — Seek Down
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
3 — Status Bar
4 — Bottom Menu Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse Button
10 — Radio Bands
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — View Next Preset Radio Station
3 — Status Bar
4 — Map Button
5 — HD Radio (if equipped)
6 — Bottom Menu Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Tune Button
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse Button
12 — Source Select/Radio Bands
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button or Media button on the
touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in Radio mode.
VOLUME and ON/OFF Control
Push the VOLUME and ON/OFF control knob to
turn on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the VOLUME and ON/
OFF control knob clockwise increases the
volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
MUTE Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
HD Radio™ — If Equipped
HD Radio™ technology (available only in the US
and Canadian markets) works similar to
conventional radio except it allows
broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital
signal. With an HD Radio™ receiver, the listener
is provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD Radio™ can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
MULTIMEDIA 379
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press GO. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See some
examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button on the steering wheel and
say “Help”. The system provides you with a list
of commands.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 MULTIMEDIA
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display:
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
MULTIMEDIA 381
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees and
programming subject to change. Our satellite
service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in
PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our
satellite service area and in AK. © 2019
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English)
1-800-387-9983 (French)
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay Bands
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay Bands
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Traffic & Weather Button (if equipped)
7 — Audio Settings Button
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
MULTIMEDIA 383
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing
of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by
pressing the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in
steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the
content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can
not be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward but-
ton on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The Radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of
Live content.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite artist or song are
being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Traffic & Weather — Available On The 4C NAV (If
Equipped)
Press the Traffic & Weather button on the
touchscreen to tune to a SiriusXM® Traffic and
Weather channel. To set a Traffic & Weather
alert for any one of the cities in the Jump
Browse list, see Browse in SXM.
If the Traffic & Weather alert city is not set, you
are presented with a pop-up to allow you to
select the favorite city using the Browse screen.
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many sub menus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
MULTIMEDIA 385
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List, or
Genre, to display all the SiriusXM® Channel
Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by
pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on
the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also
be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob.
Genre Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can
select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a Visual alert or
Audible and Visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on
the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll
list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of
all teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 MULTIMEDIA
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” section in this
chapter for further information.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
5 — Loudness
6 — Aux Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
5 — Loudness
6 — Aux Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
MULTIMEDIA 387
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
5 — Aux Volume Offset
6 — Auto Play
7 — Radio Off With Door
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to Balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Pressing the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and
drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3.
This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
MULTIMEDIA 389
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Operating
Media Mode
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
1 — Repeat
2 — Track Time
3 — Shuffle
4 — Info
5 — Tracks
6 — Browse
7 — Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Track Time
3 — Shuffle
4 — Info
5 — Tracks
6 — Browse
7 — Source Select
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped), or by
pressing the Media button on the faceplate and
then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB mode and begin to play when
you insert the device. The display will show the
track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect System.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the “Phone Mode”
section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
MULTIMEDIA 391
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Source Select
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped) or
pushing the Media button on the faceplate and
then selecting the Source button and then the
AUX button.
To insert to auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode
and begin to play when you insert the device
cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the ON/OFF rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folders, Artists,
Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob
can also be used to scroll.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 MULTIMEDIA
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate
the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
For information on audio setting, refer to “Audio
Settings” in the “Radio Mode” section.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob
to highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing that
track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Voice Commands Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports. Voice operation
is only available for connected USB and AUX
devices.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
MULTIMEDIA 393
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Reply. Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,”
“Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device
via the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or call
800-800-387-9983 (French)
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the phone mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contact” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
MULTIMEDIA 395
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button on
the touchscreen or Phone button on the radio
faceplate.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters phone mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones and Audio
Devices button and then press Paired
Phones button or press the Paired
Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
MULTIMEDIA 397
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect System.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Ucon-
nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3
with 5-inch Display radio, please refer to “Pair
(Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone”
within this section.
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press Paired Phones/Audio
Sources buttons or press the Paired
Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
MULTIMEDIA 399
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press Paired Phones/Audio
Sources buttons or press the Paired
Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect System.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 MULTIMEDIA
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up, select Add to
Favorites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
MULTIMEDIA 401
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Ignore
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Join Calls
5 — End
1 — Answer
2 — Join Calls
3 — Transfer
4 — Mute/Unmute
5 — Ignore/Decline
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 MULTIMEDIA
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press Dial/Call.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
Calls without a reply
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Uconnect Phone button
on the steering wheel, press the Answer button
on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
MULTIMEDIA 403
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Call”.
To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls”.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 MULTIMEDIA
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
button the Phone main screen to combine all
calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
MULTIMEDIA 405
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the Uco-
nnect features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previous incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traf-
fic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> min-
utes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
MULTIMEDIA 407
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your
voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses
your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone OFF/ON. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science, and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™ follow
the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display And LTE Data
Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon. Android Auto™ launches
immediately. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
MULTIMEDIA 409
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free Calling and Texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button until the beep on the
steering wheel or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect Navigation system (if
equipped) will launch instead of the Android
Auto’s™ Google Maps™.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
the Android Auto™, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you would
like to switch from Uconnect navigation to
smartphone navigation. A pop-up also appears,
asking if you’d like to switch, if Android Auto™ is
currently in use and you attempt to launch a
built-in Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes”
switches the navigation type to the newly used
method of navigation and a route is planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the navi-
gation type remains unchanged.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access
and stream your favorite music with
apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press
and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to the Android
Auto™. This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™ every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android
Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
MULTIMEDIA 411
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay®
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® launches
immediately. You can also press the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to launch
it.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display And LTE Data
Coverage
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s®
data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music, news,
sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Press and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button until the
beep on the steering wheel or tap the
Microphone icon to ask Apple® to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect Navigation system (if
equipped) will launch instead of the Apple
CarPlay’s® Apple® Maps.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
MULTIMEDIA 413
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
Apple CarPlay®, via voice or any other method,
a pop-up appears asking if you would like to
switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone®
navigation. A pop-up also appears, asking if
you’d like to switch, if an Apple CarPlay® navi-
gation is currently in use and you attempt to
launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting
“Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly
used method of navigation and a route is
planned for the new destination. If “No” is
selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Apple CarPlay®, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Apple
CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 MULTIMEDIA
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone® and app down-
loaded from the Apple® IOS App Store. Apple
CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that begins playing music off of the connected
device as soon as it is connected. This feature
can be turned On or Off in the Uconnect Settings
within the Audio Settings category.
NOTE:
AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display AutoPlay
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® features
cannot be used with Bluetooth®. A USB connec-
tion is required for its use. Android Auto™ and
Apple CarPlay® use both Bluetooth® and USB
connections to function, and the connected
device is unavailable to other devices when
connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
the passenger can stream music.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
MULTIMEDIA 415
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
(UCONNECT 4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH
DISPLAY ONLY)
Operating Navigation
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav
button on the touchscreen.
Navigation Button
Press Where To? to find or route to a destina-
tion.
Press View Map to view the map.
Press Home to navigate to a preset home
address. If not already, set the system will
prompt you to add a home address.
Press Work to navigate to a preset work
address. If not already, set the system will
prompt you to add a work address.
Press Information to view Traffic, Where Am
I? and Trip Computer information.
Press Emergency to search for Hospitals,
Police and Fire Stations near your current
location. You can also display your current
location and save any Emergency facility
location to your Favorites.
Press the search bar at the top of the screen
to search for a specific address to route to.
Press Route Options and select from a list of
options to alter your route such as Express-
ways, Toll Roads, Ferries, Carpool Lanes, and
more.
Where To?
Where To? — Main Menu
Where To? Button
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Where To?
button and select one of the following methods
to program a route guidance.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for further information.
Search All Press this button to search all “Where To?” categories for a location.
Address
Press this button to search by a street address or a street name with
house number.
Recent Press this button to access previously routed addresses or locations.
Favorites Press this button to access previously saved addresses or locations.
Point of Interest
Press this button when you want to route to a point of interest. The
Point of Interest (POI) database allows you to select a destination from
a list of locations and public places, or points of interest.
Trips Press this button to program a new trip or recall a saved trip.
Intersection Press this button to enter in two street names as a destination.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
MULTIMEDIA 417
Point on Map
Press this button to select a destination directly from the Map screen.
By selecting a street segment or icon, you can quickly enter a destina-
tion without the need to input the city name or street.
Home
Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved home
address.
Work
Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved work
address.
City Center
Press this button to route to a particular city. The navigation system will
calculate a route with the destination at the center of the city.
Closest Cities
Press this button to route to a nearby city. The screen will display an
alphabetical listing of nearby cities. The navigation system will calcu-
late a route with the destination at the center of the nearby city.
Phone Number
Press this button to route to a location or point of interest by the phone
number.
GEO Coordinates
Press this button to route to a GEO Coordinate. A GEO coordinate is a
coordinate used in geography. You can determine a GEO coordinate
with the help of a handheld GPS receiver, a map, or the navigation sys-
tem.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 MULTIMEDIA
If you are currently on a route guidance and you
select Recent, the system will ask you to choose
one of the following:
Cancel previous route
Add to Current Route
Within “Add to Current Route”, you can add
the destination to your current route, or set it
as the final destination.
NOTE:
You can press the Back Arrow button to return
to the previous screen or the X button to exit.
Where To? — Search All, Address, Recent,
And Favorite Destinations
Search All
1. Press the Search All button.
2. Enter the location name, street address,
city, etc., you wish to search for, to search
all “Where To?” categories for the entered
location, and press OK.
Search
Trails
Press the Trails button and select the option to start trail recording to
track the route you are driving. Select the option to “stop trail record-
ing” to end tracking. This gives you a point of reference for a particular
route if needed.
Edit Where To?
Press this button and select which “Where To?” categories you would
like to appear in the “Where To?” menu, and which ones you don’t.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
MULTIMEDIA 419
3. Select the desired location from the list of
locations that appears. Once the correct
location has been selected, you will be
asked to confirm your route by pressing
Route To.
4. Press the GO! button on the touchscreen to
begin your route.
GO! Button
Address
1. Press the Address button.
2. Press Spell City or Spell Street to begin
entering the address of your destination.
Enter Address
If you press Spell City, you will have to enter
and select/press the desired city name, fol-
lowed by the desired street name, and then
the house number.
If you press Spell Street, you will have to en-
ter and select/press the desired street
name in the correct city, and then you will
have to enter the house number.
Select Street
To change the state and/or country, press
the state, country button and follow the
prompts to change the state and/or coun-
try.
Once the correct City, Street and Number
have been entered, you will be asked to con-
firm your route by pressing Route To.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 MULTIMEDIA
Recent
1. Press the Recent button.
2. Press the button with the name of the
desired destination.
To display the options for a destination from
the list, press the Gear Icon, which opens a
pop-up menu with the options for that desti-
nation.
To delete a destination from the list, press
Delete in that pop-up menu.
Gear Icon
The following Options are available for each
destination:
Manage Destinations
Edit Name
Phone Number
Move Up
Move Down
Place Pin (saves the spot on the list)
Delete
3. Select “Route To” to confirm your route.
4. Press GO! to confirm your destination, and
begin your route.
Favorite Destinations
1. Press the Favorites button.
2. Press the button with the name of the
desired favorite destination and confirm the
route with “Route To.” Press GO! to confirm
the destination, and start the route
guidance.
3. To delete a destination from the list, press
the Gear icon next to the destination and
select “Delete” in the pop-up menu on the
touchscreen.
4. To save a favorite destination, press the
Add Favorite and follow the steps to route a
destination.
5. To display the options for a favorite
destination press the Options that looks like
a gear.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
MULTIMEDIA 421
The following Options are available for each
favorite destination:
Edit Name
Phone Number
Move Up
Move Down
Delete
Where To? — Point of Interest
To enter a destination by Point of Interest (POI),
press the Where To? button from the Nav Main
Menu, then press the POI Categories button.
POI Categories Button
The Point of Interest database allows you to
select a destination from a list of locations and
public places, or points of interest.
You have the following POIs to choose from:
You can also change your POI search area by
pressing any of the category buttons and
pressing the Search Area button.
Search Area
You will have the following options to change
your search area:
Around Here
In a City or Zip Code
Along Route (only available during route guid-
ance)
Around Destination (only available during
route guidance)
Around Next Waypoint
Search By Name
POI Categories
Restaurants
Hotel/Motel
Gas Stations
Rest Area
ATM/Bank
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 MULTIMEDIA
POI — Search By Name
1. Press the Search by Name button.
A keyboard will appear on the screen. Type
in the POI that you want to search and press
the List button to display available items.
2. Press the desired POI and press Route To to
confirm the route.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
POI — POI Categories
1. Press POI Categories button.
You can search through the available POI
categories to find your desired POI.
The available categories are:
List All POIs
ATM or Banking
Automotive
Coffee Shops
Community
Entertainment
Gas Stations
Highway Exit
Hotels or Motels
Local Services
Medical
Parking
Parks and Recreation
Restaurants
Shopping
Travel and Transportation
NOTE:
Select a category and then select a subcategory
if necessary. Press the ABC button to activate a
keyboard to search within the POI categories.
ABC Keyboard
2. Press the desired POI and press Route To to
confirm the route.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
MULTIMEDIA 423
POI — Restaurant, Hotel/Motel, Gas Stations,
Rest Area, And ATM/Banking
1. Press the corresponding button for the POI
category you would like to navigate to.
You can search for a POI by the following
categories, which are button tabs at the top
of the screen:
Name
Distance
ABC (Search)
POIs Around Here
2. Press the desired POI destination and press
Route To to confirm the route.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
Where To? — Trips
1. Press the Trips button
2. To route to a saved Trip, follow these steps:
a. Press the button with the name of the
desired Trip and press the first destina-
tion in the list.
b. Confirm the route by pressing Route To,
and then press GO! to confirm the desti-
nation and to start the route guidance.
3. To add a Trip, follow these steps:
a. Press the Create New Trip button.
b. Press the Destination button, and then
press Pick Destination.
c. Press Add Destination or Insert Final
Destination to add waypoints and desti-
nations to your trip.
d. Choose from the following options to add
a destination
• Address
• Recent
• Point of Interest
• Favorites
• Home
• Intersection
• GEO Coordinates
• Point on Map
• City Center
• Closest Cities
• Phone Number
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen
option for further information.
e. To save your Trip, you must press Calcu-
late Route and press Save.
f. Your new Trip will appear on the Trips list.
4. To delete a Trip from the list, press the Gear
icon and then select “Delete” from the
pop-up menu.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 MULTIMEDIA
5. To display the options for a trip, press the
Gear icon.
6. The following Options are available for each
trip:
Edit Name
Move Up
Move Down
Delete
Where To? — Point on Map And Intersection
Point On Map
1. Press the Point on Map button.
2. Use the touchscreen to drag the center of
the cross over the desired destination.
Point On Map
3. To enter a destination by Point on Map,
follow these steps:
a. Once your cross is where you want it,
press Route To, or select “Places Nearby”
to select a nearby destination. Then
press GO! to confirm the destination and
begin route guidance.
Intersection
1. Press the Intersection button.
2. Press the Spell City or Spell Street button to
enter the desired city or street name.
NOTE:
If the system automatically recognizes the city,
or street, it will populate a list of recognized
cities, or streets. If not, press the List button to
select from the available options.
Select Street
3. If “Spell Street” was selected, you must
select the correct street, you will then be
asked to spell the intersecting street, and
then the desired city.
4. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route, and then press GO! to confirm the
destination and begin your route.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
MULTIMEDIA 425
Where To? — Home And Work
Home
1. Press the Home button. If there is no Home
Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it
now.
2. To enter your Home Address, follow these
steps:
a. To set your Home Address choose one of
the following options:
• Spell City
• Spell Street
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen
option for further information.
Once you have generated your Home Ad-
dress, you will be asked to Save it.
b. Press the Save Home button to confirm
your destination and begin the route to
your Home Address.
c. This address will be saved as your Home
Address and it can be accessed by
pressing the Home button in the Where
To? Menu.
3. To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new
Home location, follow these steps:
a. Press the Nav button, and in the “Where
To” screen, press Edit Where To.
b. Press the Home button.
c. Under the Manage screen, press the
Reset Location button.
A confirmation screen will appear asking,
“Are you sure you want to reset this loca-
tion?”. Press “Reset” to confirm the deletion
and then set a new Home location by follow-
ing the previous instructions.
Work
1. Press the Work button. If there is no Work
Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it
now.
2. To set your Work Address, choose one of the
following options:
Spell City
Spell Street
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen
option for further information.
Once you have generated your Work Ad-
dress, you will be asked to Save it.
3. Press the Save Work button to confirm your
destination and begin the route to your
Work Address.
4. This address will be saved as your Work
Address and it can be accessed by pressing
the Work button in the Where To? Menu.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 MULTIMEDIA
Where To? — City Center And Closest Cities
City Center
1. Press the City Center button.
2. To enter a destination by City Center, follow
these steps:
a. Enter the name of the City you would like
to route to.
Select City Or Zip
b. Press the desired city from the list.
c. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route, and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
Closest Cities
1. Press the Closest Cities button.
2. Press the desired city from the list.
3. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
Where To? — Phone, GEO-Coordinates, And
Trails
Phone
1. Press the Phone Number button.
2. To enter a destination by Phone number,
follow these steps:
a. Enter the Phone Number of the business
you would like to route to.
b. Press the desired destination from the
list.
c. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route, and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
GEO-Coordinates
1. Press the GEO-Coordinates button.
2. Enter the Latitude by typing in the numbers.
Use the dial pad to select specific numbers
in the location shown.
GEO Coordinates
3. Press the OK button.
4. Enter the Longitude by typing in the
numbers. Use the dial pad to select specific
numbers in the location shown.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
MULTIMEDIA 427
5. Press OK to confirm the destination.
6. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route, and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
Trails
1. Press the Trails button.
2. Press Start Recording.
Start Recording Trails
3. When you want to end the recording of a
route, press the Record button, and press
Yes to confirm.
The trip you recorded will be added to the
Recent Trails list.
Before Route Guidance
Before confirming the destination with the GO!
button, it is possible to select options different
from the default route settings.
Route Options — Press the Route Options
button to display a list of options to alter your
route. To make a selection press and release
the desired setting.
Route Options Button
Route Options
Avoid — Press the Avoid button to choose
road types to avoid during your route. To
make a selection, press and release the
desired setting.
1 — Round Trip
2 — Expressways Allowed
3 — Toll Roads Allowed
4 — Ferries Allowed
5 — Carpool Lanes Allowed
6 — Car Shuttle Trains Allowed
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 MULTIMEDIA
Avoid Button
Detour Types
NOTE:
Since toll roads, tunnels and ferries are built for
the purpose of shortening travel distances,
avoiding these road types may increase
distance and travel time.
Save — Press the Save button to save the
destination as a Trip.
Press the GO! button to confirm your
destination and to start your route guidance.
View Map
View Map — Main Menu
Press the View Map button from the Nav Main
Menu to display a map of your current position.
View Map Button
With the map displayed you have the following
features available:
Menu
Press this button to return to the Nav Main
Menu.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
MULTIMEDIA 429
Zoom In +/Zoom Out –
Press the Zoom In (+) or Zoom Out (–) buttons
to change the zoom level. Roads with lower
functional classification are not shown in higher
zoom levels. (e.g., residential streets,
lightly-traveled county roads.)
Time of Arrival/Time to Destination/Distance
(only during route guidance)
Press the button in the upper right area of the
screen to the display items available. Press the
desired option button.
Time of Arrival
Time to Destination
Distance
Turn List (only during route guidance)
Press the area in the upper center part of the
screen that displays your next turn to see a Turn
List for your current route.
Press a turn in the displayed Turn List for the
following options:
Show on Map
Avoid Street
Options (only during route guidance)
Press the Options button to display the following
options.
2D North Up/Map View 2D/Map View 3D
Press this button to scroll between the three
viewing options.
Repeat Directions
Press this button to repeat the current voice
prompt.
Mute Guidance
Press this button to mute the voice prompts.
Stop Guidance
Press this button to stop route guidance.
Settings
Press this button to view all the available
settings. See View Map — Settings for more
information.
View Map — Settings
With the Map displayed, press the button on the
bottom right of the map that has three
horizontal lines on it. Then press the Settings
button.
View Map Settings Icon
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 MULTIMEDIA
View Map Settings Button
The following Map Settings are available:
Map Settings
Map Setup — Press this button to display
items to customize how your map is viewed.
Refer to “Settings — Map Setup” within this
section for further information.
Speed Limit — Press this button to turn on/off
speed limit warning announcements and to
enter a pre-defined speed limit for your route.
Guidance — Press this button to display items
to customize your route guidance. Refer to
“Settings — Guidance” within this section for
further information.
Traffic — Press this button to set how you
receive traffic information updates.
GPS (DMS) — Press this button to change the
GPS display.
Decimal
Degrees-Minutes-Seconds (DMS)
Degrees-Minutes (DM)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
MULTIMEDIA 431
Settings — Map Setup
With the Map displayed, press the button in the
bottom right corner of the map that has three
horizontal bars on it, then press the Settings
button and then the Map Setup button.
Map Setup
The following Map Setup options are available:
Map Setup Options
Map View
Press this button to change how the Map View
is displayed.
3D (Must Select 3D City Models Or 3D Land-
marks For 3D Map View To Display.)
2D
2D North Up
Map Appearance
Press this button to select different themes for
your map.
Display Current Street
Press this button to turn on/off the current
street display on the lower center of the Map
View. Press and release the button until a
check-mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Display Current City
Press this button to turn on/off the current city
display in the lower right of the Map View. Press
and release the button until a check-mark
appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Destination Information
Press this button to change the Destination
Information that is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Map View.
Time of Arrival
Time to Destination
Distance
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Zoom
Press this button to change how the Auto Zoom
feature adjusts the zoom level during guidance
in Map View.
Far
Medium
Low
Off
Vehicle Icon
Press this button to change the Vehicle icon
that is displayed while in Map View. Press
Previous or Next to view the available icons.
Press the Back icon button when you've made
your selection.
Show POI Icons
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to show the selected Point
of Interest icons while in Map View. Press and release the button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
POI Categories
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the available
Point of Interest icons you would like displayed while in Map View. Press
and release the desired selection until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Traffic Incidents — If Equipped
Press the Traffic button within the Map Setup screen to show Traffic Mes-
sage Channel (TMC) Incidents while in Map View. Press and release the
button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Speed And Flow
Press the Speed Limit button within the Map Setup screen to show the
Speed and Flow of traffic while in Map View. Press and release the button
until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
MULTIMEDIA 433
3D City Models
Press the 3D City Models button within Map Setup screen to display 3D
City Models while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
3D Landmarks
Press the 3D Landmarks within the Map Setup screen to display 3D
Landmarks while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Digital Terrain Model
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the area’s ter-
rain while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Park Areas
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Park Areas while
in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Railroads
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Railroad tracks
while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
City Areas
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display City Areas while
in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
River Names
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display River Names
while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 MULTIMEDIA
Settings — Guidance
With the Map displayed, press the Options
button, then press the Settings button and then
the Guidance button. You can also access this
menu by pressing the Settings button in the
lower right of the Nav Main Menu.
Guidance Button
The following Guidance options are available:
Play Voice Guidance
Press this button to enable Voice Guidance Prompts during route guid-
ance. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Nav Guidance Volume
Press the + or – buttons to adjust the Nav Voice Prompt Volume.
NOTE:
If the NAV Volume Adjustment setting is set between level 0 and 11, it will
default to level 12 on a vehicle restart. If the NAV Volume Adjustment
setting is set between level 13 and 38 it will RETAIN the setting on a
vehicle restart.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
MULTIMEDIA 435
Lane Recommendation
Press this button to enable Lane Recommendation during route guid-
ance. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Junction View
Press this button to enable Junction View during route guidance. Press
and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
TMC Route Mode (If Equipped)
Press this button to change how the Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Route Mode functions during route guidance. Select from:
Automatic
By Delay Time
Manual
Off
TMC Avoidance Types (If Equipped)
Press this button to display the available Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Avoidance Types you would like displayed while in route guidance. Press
and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Sign Posts
Press this button to display the Sign Posts types you would like displayed
while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button
until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Route Progress Bar
Press this button to display the Route Progress Bar while in route guid-
ance. Press and release the selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 MULTIMEDIA
Route Options
Press this button to determine which road types are OK to travel on while
in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Offer Highway Services
Press this button to display Highway Services while in route guidance.
Press and release the selection button until a check mark appears, show-
ing the setting has been selected.
Highway Services
Press this button to display the available Highway Service Types you
would like displayed while in route guidance. Press and release the
desired selection button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
Use Real Time Traffic
Press this button to display Real Time Traffic Updates while in route guid-
ance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Provide Detours on Traffic Events
Press this button to display detours on traffic events while in route guid-
ance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Confirm Detours Manually
Press this button to make it mandatory for you to have to confirm detours
manually while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selec-
tion button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Provide Detours That Save More Than X Min.
Press this button to allow the navigation system to display the available
detours if they save you a predetermined amount of minutes, while in
route guidance. Press and release the desired plus or minus button until
you have selected the desired number of minutes saved, from five min-
utes to one hour in increments of five minutes.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
MULTIMEDIA 437
Information
Information
Information Button
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Information
button and select one of the following options to
view additional information:
Traffic Traffic displays detailed traffic information, .
Weather
Weather displays detailed weather information about your current posi-
tion.
Where Am I?
Where Am I? displays the address and GEO-Coordinates of your current
location.
1. Press the Show GPS Info button to view the GPS information.
2. Press the Save button to save the location in your Favorites.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 MULTIMEDIA
Trip Computer
Trip Computer displays the following trip information from your last trip:
Travel Direction
Distance to final Destination
Vehicle Speed
Distance Traveled
Overall average speed
Moving average speed
Maximum speed
Total time traveled
Travel time spent moving
Travel time spent stopped
Country Info
Select the desired country on the touchscreen. Information, such as aver-
age speed limits and specific phone number country codes, will be pro-
vided about the selected country.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
MULTIMEDIA 439
Emergency
Emergency
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Emergency
button and press one of the following options to
search and route to a specific location.
Emergency Button
Emergency Nearby Options
Press the Where Am I? button to display your
exact current location.
Press the Save button to save your current
location in Favorites.
You can search for a Hospital, Police
Department, or Fire Department by the
following categories, which are button tabs at
the top of the screen:
Name
Distance
ABC (Search)
NOTE:
In case of emergency, please contact the facility
to verify their availability before proceeding.
Press the desired Hospital, Police Depart-
ment, or Fire Department and press Route To
to confirm your route, and then press GO! to
confirm the destination and begin route guid-
ance.
1 — Hospital
2 — Police
3 — Fire Department
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 MULTIMEDIA
Map Updates
The map data available in your vehicle is the
most up-to-date information that was available
when your vehicle was built. Map data is
updated periodically as map information
changes. Follow the steps below if you wish to
obtain an update for your vehicle.
1. Please visit
chryslergroup.navigation.com
to obtain your map update. At the top of the
page, click the brand of your vehicle. Then,
at the drop down menu, select your vehicle
model and its model year. You will then be
directed to a page that will let you know if
your vehicle needs a map update or not.
2. Or, visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveU-
connect.ca (Canada) and follow these
steps:
Under the “Help & Support” tab, select
your vehicle brand, model, and year.
Then, click “SYSTEM UPDATES.” Simply
follow the steps and place your order.
3. Or, if you wish, you can also visit your dealer
or place a phone call to request your Map
Update. US/CAN General Consumer
Support:
888-628-6277
FCA US LLC Dealer Garmin Support:
877-628-4480
FCA US LLC Consumer FreshMaps
866-422-8171
SiriusXM® Travel Link
In addition to delivering over 160 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM® offers
premium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM®
Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information
into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.
Weather — Check variety of local and national
weather information from radar maps to
current and five day forecast.
Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station of
your choice.
Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as
well as weekly schedules.
Movie Listings — Check local movie theaters
and listings in your area and route to the
theater of your choice.
SiriusXM® Travel Link feature is completely
integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after
you start your vehicle, Travel Link information
arrives and updates in the background. You can
access the information whenever you like, with
no waiting.
To access SiriusXM® Travel Link, press the
Apps button on the touchscreen, then the
SiriusXM® Travel Link button.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription
included with your vehicle purchase.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
MULTIMEDIA 441
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus
“Don't drive through traffic. Drive around it.”
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By
enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information,
you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time
along your route. Since the service is integrated
with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM®
Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest
route based on traffic conditions.
1. Detailed information on traffic speed,
accidents, construction, and road closings.
2. Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
3. Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic
information.
4. View conditions for points along your route
and beyond.
CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM® services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle.
Refer to “Data Collection and Privacy” in this
section for further information.
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect device, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas. Other factors outside the
control of SiriusXM Guardian™ that may limit or
prevent service delivery are hills, structures,
buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the elec-
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 MULTIMEDIA
trical system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances,
actions of third parties or the government,
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of
your vehicle, such as in an underground parking
structure or under a bridge.
For a complete list of available SiriusXM
Guardian™ services, please visit:
US residents: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html.
Canadian residents: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock your doors
using the Uconnect App, by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or by logging on
to your owner site at www.mopar.com/en-us/
care/owners-manual.html (US Residents) or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). You
can also remotely start your vehicle (if
equipped) from virtually anywhere and acti-
vate your horn and lights via the app or owner
site.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your Ucon-
nect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect System and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect system includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included Trials apply to new vehicles only.
For a more complete description, please refer to
DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by
visiting the SiriusXM Guardian™ Store or calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent at:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
Getting Started With SiriusXM Guardian™
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
MULTIMEDIA 443
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For further information, please visit:
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using remote
commands.
To use the Uconnect app:
Once you have activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services, download the Uconnect
app to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the app.
Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote
Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and
lights remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper
left corner of the app to bring up app settings
and access the Assist Call Centers.
NOTE:
For further information:
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website www.mopar.com/
en-us/care/owners-manual.html (US
Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information
you need, all in one place. You can track your
service history, find recommended accessories
for your vehicle, watch videos about your
vehicle's features, and easily access your user
guides and manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the “Edit Profile”
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ equipped vehicle.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), or if your security alarm is
set off, you can elect to receive a text message,
push notifications, and/or E-mail to notify you of
the event. To set up the notifications, please
follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/
owners-manual.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents).
2. Click the Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, you can edit Notification
Preferences.
4. You can enter one mobile phone and/or
E-mail address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
Using SiriusXM Guardian™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
on-board assistance features located on the
rear view mirror designed to enhance your
driving experience if you should ever need
assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call is a feature that, at the push of a
button, can contact emergency services. It’s a
convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between
the vehicle and the live agent is made, your
vehicle will automatically transmit location
information to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care. In the event of a minor collision, medical
or any other emergency, press the SOS button
to be connected to a call center agent who can
send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s
location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
MULTIMEDIA 445
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10 second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button or press the Cancel
button on the touchscreen within 10
seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through mobile versus
the hands-free system which is not available
due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
is made, the SOS Call system will connect
your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent who will stay on the
line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The SOS light will continuously be illuminated
red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key has been removed from the
ignition and the delayed accessories mode is
active.
The ignition key is in OFF position.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 MULTIMEDIA
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ System. Vehicle must
be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency
call. To avoid interference that can cause
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON (IN-
CLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN SERVICES
WILL NOT OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
MULTIMEDIA 447
(Continued)
Roadside Assistance Call
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
on-board assistance features located on the
rear view mirror designed to enhance your
driving experience if you should ever need
assistance or support.
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button.
Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ services have
been activated, the ASSIST button can connect
you directly to one of four important care
centers for support.
Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
someone who can help anytime. Additional
fees may apply. (See the Disclaimers section
below for more details.)
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care —
Contact the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care call center to activate your services,
renew after your trial has expired, and for
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ system or help answering any
general questions surrounding your
connected services.
Uconnect Care Call — In-vehicle support for
all non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care Call — Total support for your
vehicle.
How It Works
You or someone in the vehicle simply presses
the ASSIST button and you will be presented
with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen.
Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the air bag system is detected. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air
bag system may not be working properly
and the SOS Call system may not be able to
send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care center. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle
immediately.
Ignoring the SOS light could mean you will
not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
SOS light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the U.S.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Use the mobile app to easily search and send
your locations directly to your vehicle navigation
system. It’s easy to enter and great for quick
access on the go.
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, browse through one
of the categories provided, or type the name
or keyword in the search box at the top of
the App. You can also select categories
such as Favorites or Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the “Send To Vehicle” option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
MULTIMEDIA 449
Vehicle Finder
Forget where you parked your car? We'll help
you locate it! Simply use the Uconnect App on
your smartphone and you'll be on track.
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle when you have lost it. You can also
sound the horn and flash the lights to make
finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then touch the Vehicle icon to find
your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
Three options will appear:
Map
Satellite
Hybrid
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect System.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Create A Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
Description
Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service
that connects your device to the AT&T
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go where ever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 MULTIMEDIA
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable enabled media can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
How It Works
The Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle
passengers with an internet access hotspot in
the vehicle, using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other portable
enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to
the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total
data. The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
Give it a Try!
Purchase a subscription to the Wi-Fi Hotspot
feature 3 different ways:
1. From your in-vehicle touchscreen select
the Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the “How
To Purchase” button and follow the
on-screen instructions.
2. Log onto your owner site and click the link to
the AT&T portal to get setup.
3. For existing Connect Car customers: Press
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased you can
change its name and the password by selecting
the Wi-Fi App and pressing the “Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot” button. You can also view the
connected devices from the app screen by
pressing the “View Connected Devices” button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the Wi-Fi
Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. You should contact local law
enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle
report. Once the report has been filed with law
enforcement, you may notify SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care that you have filed
the report. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number issued by local law enforcement. The
vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea-
tures and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
MULTIMEDIA 451
and must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ with an active subscription that
includes this feature. In addition, the vehicle
must be within the United States.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care can be
reached by:
US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents calling:
1-877-324-9091
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the Ucon-
nect App, you can push the “Settings”
button on your device, select “ASSIST Call
Centers,” and then select “SiriusXM Guard-
ian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect System.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Lock Or Unlock Your Vehicle From Virtually
Anywhere Using Your Computer, Mobile Device,
Or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care App.
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
distance. You can send a request to your vehicle
in one of three ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device
From the your Owner’s Site
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works
Uconnect App:
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To lock the doors, push the button with the
Closed Lock icon; to unlock the doors push
the button with the Open Lock icon.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner’s Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
system.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Push the Door Lock icon next to your vehicle
information.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command has been sent to
your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care:
1. If you need to unlock the doors of your
vehicle, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care by:
US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents calling:
1-877-324-9091
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to lock or
unlock your vehicle. The agent will send a
command to your vehicle to get the task
done.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
MULTIMEDIA 453
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/ Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Care agents are
trained to help you with unlocking of your door
(for example, in an accidental lock-out). All other
Remote Services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Use Your Computer or Wireless Device App to
Start the Engine And Remotely Warm Up or Cool
Down the Vehicle
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior before you have to get in. You
can send a request to your vehicle in one of two
ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
From the Your Owner Site website.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up notifications for your account
push notifications every time a command is
sent to Remote Start or cancel a Remote Start.
How It Works
SiriusXM Guardian™ For Uconnect App:
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To start the engine, press the “circular
arrow.” To turn off an engine that has been
remote started, press the circular arrow
with an X in the middle button.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when your
registered your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 MULTIMEDIA
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours,
you will see a row of icons. On your
dashboard you will see remote command
icons. To start the engine, press the
“circular arrow,” to turn-off an engine that
has been remote started press the Cancel
button.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not trained for Remote Vehicle Start
services.
Remote Horn & Lights
Can't Find Your Vehicle In The Parking Lot?
Sound The Horn And Flash The Lights On Your
Vehicle To Locate It
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can
send a request to your vehicle in one of two
ways:
Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
From your Owner’s Site website.
If you want, you can set up, push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
Uconnect App:
How It Works
1. Download the Uconnect App to a
compatible device and login using your
username and password.
2. To turn on the horn and lights, press the
Trumpet icon.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
command was sent (or not).
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
MULTIMEDIA 455
5. It will take a little while for the command to
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes
depends on a number of technical
conditions.
6. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner Site website:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site website using
the username and password you used
when registering your SiriusXM Guardian™
system.
If you forgot your username or password,
links are provided on the website to help
you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours,
you will see a row of icons. To turn on the
horn and lights, press the Trumpet icon. To
turn off the horn and lights, press the
Trumpet icon again.
NOTE:
A quicker way to turn off your Remote Horn &
Lights would be to push the Panic button on
your Key Fob if you are near the vehicle.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for your regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect System in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless and until you
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
us to deactivate your Uconnect system at:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian/
privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem under the hood with one of
your vehicle’s key systems. For further
information, go to your Owner’s Site website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register, and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or to
alert you of other important information, such
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages, or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <vehicle name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask Jeep Wrangler to lock my car.”
“Alexa®, ask Dodge Challenger to start my
car.”
“Alexa®, ask Chrysler Pacifica to drive to
1000 Chrysler Dr, Auburn Hills, MI.”
“Alexa®, what’s the traffic like in Detroit?”
An activate subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™
is required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first,
register for SiriusXM Guardian™ using the
following steps:
1. Press the apps icon on the bottom bar of
your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle, or
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for Uconnect, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
MULTIMEDIA 457
5. Link Uconnect to the Skill by tapping LINK
ACCOUNT.
6. Log In using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for Uconnect Access.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the Uconnect
Skill.
You can now begin using the Uconnect Skill on
Alexa®!
Drive Alerts— If Equipped
Family Alerts helps promote safer driving and
gives you peace of mind when your loved ones
are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Boundary Alert lets you know the moment
your vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Curfew Alerts lets you know when your car is
being driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Valet Alerts lets you know if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter–mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
SmartWatch integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security pin.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch integration.
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account
How To Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
For further assistance call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care:
US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™ if you have an active subscription,
push the ASSIST button on the rear view mirror
and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a
SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held in a queue
until an agent is available or go to your Owner’s
Site website. If you do not have an active
subscription, push the ASSIST button and click
the Activate button to activate services.
You can also phone SiriusXM Guardian™
directly by:
US calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091
SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours:
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00
pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
Connected Services SOS FAQs
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have 10
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
push the SOS Call button again, or press
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-message has a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can
choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
MULTIMEDIA 459
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
“Panic” button.
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs
1.
What to do if my vehicle is stolen?
First, call
local law enforcement as soon as possible.
They will work with you to file a stolen
vehicle report. Then SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care can be contacted by:
US calling: 1-844-796-4827
Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091
Inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
that your vehicle has been stolen and that
you have filed a stolen vehicle report with
law enforcement. SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care will help you through the pro-
cess.
2. Can someone locate my vehicle? To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
3. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
4. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription, to find
out if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 MULTIMEDIA
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allows us
to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with
below average coverage, it may take longer
to log in and send commands.
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
Lights will continue for 20 seconds.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
Connected Services Account FAQs
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account?
Push the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror. Press the
Activate button on the touchscreen. Select
“Call Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web. If you
choose to enter your email address, you
will then confirm your email address. You
will receive an email with an activation link
that will be good for 72 hours. Once you
click the activation link, you will be
prompted to fill out your information and
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
MULTIMEDIA 461
accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you
will be directed to the SiriusXM Guardian™
home page to complete your profile and
demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
Site.
You can also call SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services. For more
information, please contact SiriusXM
Guardian™:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 MULTIMEDIA
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter noti-
fication.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
entire subscription? Pro rata refunds are
provided from the date of cancellation for
annual plans or longer. Please see the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circum-
stances. Or, for more information, call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel. For other
subscriptions, please call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care at:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care:
US call: 1-844-796-4827
Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with my device is temporarily
unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST
buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
MULTIMEDIA 463
or 3G or 4G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls
to Roadside Assistance Call may be
functioning if you have an operable
network.
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 MULTIMEDIA
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
This equipment complies with Canada radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be
installed and operated with minimum distance
20 cm (8 in) between the radiator and your
body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un
minimum de 20 cm (8 in) de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
MULTIMEDIA 465
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
9
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 467
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
10
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at (888)
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at (800)
333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects, or other reproductive
harm.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 469
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/
troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips. To access your Owner’s Information online,
please visitmopar.com
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
10
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................324
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)..........................................................178
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............297
Adding Fuel ....................................................223
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................290
Additives, Fuel ...............................................327
Adjust
Forward
....................................................... 31
Rearward..................................................... 31
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................405
Air Bag ...........................................................132
Advance Front Air Bag ...............................132
Air Bag Operation ......................................133
Air Bag Warning Light ................................131
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................134
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 138, 278
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................278
Front Air Bag .............................................132
If Deployment Occurs ................................137
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................134
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............140
Maintenance .............................................140
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............131
Side Air Bags ............................................ 134
Transporting Pets ..................................... 153
Air Bag Light.................................. 87 , 131, 154
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
............................................................ 292
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 292
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 292 , 293
Air Conditioning ............................................. 293
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................58 , 293
Air Conditioning System ................................ 292
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................58
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 310
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................20
Disarm The System .....................................21
Security Alarm ......................................20 , 90
Alexa ............................................................. 456
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
.........................................................10
Amazon Alexa ............................................... 456
Android Auto ........................................ 408 , 410
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 297 , 329
Disposal ................................................... 298
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................99
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................90 , 91, 94
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 408 , 413
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 106
Audio Settings ............................................... 386
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................60
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................61
Automatic Headlights .......................................41
Automatic High Beams .....................................41
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............57
Automatic Transmission .......................165 , 301
Adding Fluid ..................................... 301 , 331
Autostick ................................................... 167
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 301
Fluid Change ............................................. 301
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 301
Fluid Type ........................................301 , 331
Special Additives ...................................... 301
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........73
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................73
Axle Fluid....................................................... 331
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 331
B
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 222
Battery ................................................... 88 , 290
Charging System Light .................................88
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................12
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
471
Belts, Seat
.....................................................154
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................107
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................398
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................293
Brake Assist System ......................................100
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................100
Brake Fluid ....................................................331
Brake System ...................................... 299 , 324
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................324
Fluid Check ...............................................331
Master Cylinder .........................................299
Warning Light .............................................. 87
Brakes ...........................................................299
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................ 43
Bulbs, Light ....................................................155
C
Camera
..........................................................222
Camera, Rear ................................................222
Capacities, Fluid ............................................329
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
...................................... 287 , 291
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................298
Car Washes ...................................................321
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 153 , 328
CD..................................................................390
Cellular Phone ...............................................463
Certification Label ......................................... 225
Changing A Flat Tire ............................. 262 , 302
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 303
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
................................................................97
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 153
Checks, Safety .............................................. 153
Child Restraint .............................................. 141
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 144
Child Seat Installation .............................. 151
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 149
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 142
LATCH Positions ....................................... 145
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 147
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 145
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 143
Seating Positions ...................................... 144
Child Safety Locks ...........................................27
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 326
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 315
Climate Control ................................................48
Automatic ....................................................51
Manual ........................................................49
Clutch ........................................................... 299
Fluid ......................................................... 299
Coin Holder ......................................................76
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 157
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 314
Connector
UCI
...............................................................72
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............72
Console ............................................................76
Floor ............................................................76
Contract, Service ........................................... 467
Controls ........................................................ 377
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 298
Cooling System .................................... 289 , 296
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 297
Coolant Level ..........................290 , 296, 298
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 329
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 298
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 296
Inspection ................................................. 298
Points To Remember ................................ 298
Pressure Cap ............................................ 298
Radiator Cap ............................................. 298
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
.........................297 , 329, 330
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 320
Cruise Light ......................................................96
Cupholders.......................................................76
Customer Assistance .................................... 466
Customer Programmable
Features......................................333 , 344, 356
Cybersecurity ................................................ 332
11
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 40
Dealer Service ...............................................291
Defroster, Rear Window ................................... 47
Defroster, Windshield ....................................154
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 18
Deleting A Phone ...........................................398
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................................................... 40
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................289
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................276
Disc Drive ......................................................390
Disconnecting ................................................398
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................298
Disturb...........................................................403
Door Ajar................................................... 88 , 89
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 88 , 89
Door Locks ...................................................... 26
Drag & Drop ...................................................373
Driver Memory Presets ..................................379
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 28
Driving ...........................................................234
E
Electric Brake Control System
.......................100
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................... 99
Electric Park Brake ........................................159
Electric Parking Brake ...................................159
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........73
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .................... 101
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 176
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 101
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........88
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 272
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher
........................... 238
Jacking ............................................ 262 , 302
Jump Starting ........................................... 270
Overheating .............................................. 273
Tow Hooks ................................................ 277
Towing ...................................................... 276
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........97
Engine........................................................... 287
Air Cleaner ................................................ 292
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 158
Checking Oil Level .................................... 289
Compartment ........................................... 287
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 330
Cooling ............................................ 289 , 296
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 153 , 328
Fails To Start ............................................ 156
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 156
Fuel Requirements ................................... 325
Jump Starting ........................................... 270
Oil ...........................................291 , 329, 330
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 287 , 291
Oil Filter .................................................... 292
Oil Selection .................................... 291 , 329
Overheating .............................................. 273
Starting ..................................................... 156
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 291
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart .............................. 291
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 138 , 278
Ethanol.......................................................... 326
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 153 , 328
Exhaust System ...................................153 , 295
Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Exterior Lights ........................................ 40 , 155
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 457
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 292
Air Conditioning ...........................................58
Engine Oil ........................................ 292 , 330
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 292
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 238
Turn Signals ................................ 42 , 96, 155
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................41
Flat Tire Changing ......................................... 262
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 264
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 156
Floor Console ...................................................76
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 329
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 155
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
473
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil
..................................................289
Fluid, Brake ...................................................331
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................330
Fog Lights ........................................................ 42
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 28
Forward Collision Warning ................... 107 , 112
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................275
Fuel ...............................................................325
Adding .......................................................223
Additives ...................................................327
Clean Air ....................................................326
Ethanol ......................................................326
Gasoline ....................................................325
Gauge.......................................................... 91
Materials Added ........................................327
Methanol ...................................................326
Octane Rating ................................. 325 , 330
Requirements ...........................................325
Specifications ............................................330
Fuses .............................................................255
G
Gasoline, (Fuel)
.............................................325
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................326
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................326
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................. 91
Gear Ranges ................................................. 163
Gear Selector Override ................................. 274
General Information ...................................... 374
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 323
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 227
GVWR............................................................ 225
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 238
Head Restraints ...............................................33
Head Rests ......................................................33
Headlights
Automatic
....................................................41
Automatic High Beam ..................................41
Cleaning ................................................... 321
Delay ...........................................................42
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........40
Lights On Reminder .....................................41
Passing ........................................................41
Switch..........................................................40
Time Delay...................................................42
Heated Mirrors .................................................40
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
..............................................................40
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 105
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 105
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 106
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 228
Holder, Coin .....................................................76
Holder, Cup ......................................................76
Hood Prop ........................................................66
Hood Release ...................................................66
I
Ignition
.............................................................15
Switch ..........................................................15
Indentifying ................................................... 371
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 38 , 238
Instrument Cluster ....................................81 , 96
Descriptions.................................................96
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................81
Menu Items .................................................82
Instrument Cluster Display ...............................80
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 322
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 322
Interior Lights ...................................................43
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................45
Introduction .......................................................8
Inverter
Power
...........................................................74
J
Jack Location
................................................ 262
Jack Operation ............................262 , 264, 302
Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 262
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 264
Jump Starting ................................................ 270
11
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21
Keyless Entry ............................................... 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 14, 19
Remote Keyless Entry ................................. 11
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ............................................................... 12
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
............................................................... 14
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................................... 23
Enter The Trunk ........................................... 23
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ............................ 23
Passive Entry ............................................... 23
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 23
Remote Control ........................................... 23
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .................... 23
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side ............. 23
Keyless Entry ................................................... 11
Keys................................................................. 11
Replacement ........................................ 14 , 19
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................ 42
LaneSense ....................................................218
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................125
Latches..........................................................155
Lead Free Gasoline ........................................325
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................155
Life Of Tires ................................................... 312
Liftgate .....................................................67 , 68
Closing.........................................................68
Opening .......................................................67
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................47
Light Bulbs .................................................... 155
Lights ............................................................ 155
Air Bag ...................................... 87 , 131, 154
Automatic Headlights ..................................41
Automatic High Beam ..................................41
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 104
Brake Warning .............................................87
Cruise ..........................................................96
Daytime Running .........................................40
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................40
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ..................................................89
Exterior ..................................................... 155
Fog ..............................................................42
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 238
Headlight Switch ..........................................40
Headlights ...................................................40
Headlights On Reminder .............................41
High Beam ...................................................40
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................40
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 105
Instrument Cluster .......................................40
Intensity Control ..........................................43
Interior.........................................................43
Lights On Reminder .....................................41
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........91
Park .............................................................96
Passing ........................................................41
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................89
Security Alarm .............................................90
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 117
Traction Control ........................................ 104
Turn Signals ................................ 42 , 96, 155
Vanity Mirror ................................................40
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.....................................89 , 96
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 225
Tires.......................................................... 306
Locks
Child Protection
...........................................27
Power Door ..................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 117
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 293
Lug Nuts........................................................ 324
Luggage Carrier ................................................77
M
Maintenance ....................................................66
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 290
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 279
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
......................................................91 , 97
Manual
Service
...................................................... 469
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
475
Manual Transmission
.......................... 163 , 300
Fluid Level Check ......................................300
Frequency Of Fluid Change .......................300
Lubricant Selection ...................................300
Shift Speeds ..............................................163
Master Cylinder
Brakes .......................................................299
Media Mode ........................................ 389 , 390
Methanol .......................................................326
Mirrors
Heated
........................................................40
Outside........................................................ 38
Rearview ............................................38 , 238
Vanity .......................................................... 40
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................117
Mopar Parts ...................................................468
N
Navigation
Before Route Guidance
.............................427
Information ...............................................437
Map Updates .............................................440
View Map...................................................428
View Map — Main Menu ............................428
View Map — Settings .................................429
View Map — Settings — Guidance ..............434
View Map — Settings — Map Setup ...........431
Where To? .................................................415
Where To? — City Center ........................... 426
Where To? — Go Home ............................. 425
Where To? — Main Menu .......................... 415
Where To? — Phone .................................. 426
Where To? — Point of Interest .................. 421
Where To? — Point on Map ....................... 424
Where To? — Trips .................................... 423
Navigation Mode ........................................... 415
Navigation, Emergency ................................. 439
Navigation, Information Menu ...................... 437
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 158
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 123
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 325, 330
Oil Change Indicator ........................................81
Reset ...........................................................81
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 292
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 292
Oil Pressure Light .............................................89
Oil, Engine............................................ 291 , 330
Capacity.................................................... 329
Change Interval ........................................ 291
Checking................................................... 289
Dipstick .................................................... 289
Disposal ................................................... 292
Filter ................................................ 292 , 330
Filter Disposal ........................................... 292
Materials Added To .................................. 292
Pressure Warning Light ...............................89
Recommendation ............................291 , 329
Viscosity........................................... 291 , 329
Onboard Diagnostic System .............................96
Operating Navigation .................................... 415
Operating Precautions .....................................96
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ....................................9 , 469
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................38
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 273
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 320
Parking Brake ............................................... 159
ParkSense
Front And Rear
.......................................... 194
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 204
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 191
Personalized Main Menu Bar ............... 373, 441
Pets............................................................... 153
Phone Mode .................................................. 393
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 306
Point of Interest
All Points of Interest .................................. 422
Restaurants .............................................. 423
Spell Name ............................................... 422
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 324
Door Locks...................................................22
Inverter ........................................................74
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................73
11
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476
Sunroof
....................................................... 64
Windows...................................................... 60
Power Seats
Forward ....................................................... 31
Rearward..................................................... 31
Recline ........................................................31
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................128
Preparation For Jacking .................................263
Presets ..........................................................379
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
..................................................129
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................310
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............298
Radio
Presets
......................................................379
Radio Controls ...............................................377
Radio Mode ...................................................377
Radio Operation .................................. 377 , 463
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 46
Rear Camera .................................................222
Rear Cross Path .............................................110
Rear ParkSense System ...................... 191 , 194
Rear Window Defroster ................................... 47
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................47
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 38
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 29
Recreational Towing ......................................233
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................326
Refrigerant .................................................... 293
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 442
Reminder, Lights On ........................................41
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 124
Remote Control
Starting System
...........................................16
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 451, 460
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 454
Remote Features, Starting ................... 453 , 463
Remote Keyless Entry ...............................11 , 12
Arm The Alarm .............................................20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........14, 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 376
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
..................................................18
Uconnect Settings .......................................18
Remote Starting System ..................................16
Removing SiriusXM Guardian ....................... 457
Replacement Keys ....................................14 , 19
Replacement Tires ........................................ 312
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 468
Restraints, Child ........................................... 141
Restraints, Head ..............................................33
Roadside Assistance ............................ 447 , 458
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier .............................................77
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 317
S
Safety............................................................ 374
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 154
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 155
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 468
Safety Features ............................................. 374
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 302
Safety Tips .................................................... 153
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 153
Satellite Radio ............................................... 380
Saved Radio Stations .................................... 379
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 279
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................89
Seat Belts ............................................124 , 154
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 128
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 128
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 129
Child Restraints ........................................ 141
Energy Management Feature ................... 129
Front Seat ...............................124 , 125, 126
Inspection ................................................. 154
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 126
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 127
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 125
Operating Instructions .............................. 126
Pregnant Women ...................................... 128
Pretensioners ........................................... 129
Rear Seat.................................................. 125
Reminder .................................................. 124
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
477
Seat Belt Pretensioner
..............................129
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................124
Untwisting Procedure ................................127
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................322
Seats ........................................................ 28 , 31
Adjustment ........................................... 28 , 31
Head Restraints .......................................... 33
Rear Folding ................................................ 28
Reclining ..................................................... 29
Seatback Release ....................................... 28
Tilting .......................................................... 28
Security Alarm .......................................... 20 , 90
Arm The System .......................................... 20
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................330
Send & Go ........................................... 448 , 458
Sentry Key
Key Programming
........................................ 19
Sentry Key Replacement .......................... 14 , 19
Service Assistance .........................................466
Service Contract ............................................467
Service Manuals ............................................469
Settings, Audio ..............................................386
Shift Lever Override .......................................274
Shifting
Manual Transmission
................................163
Shoulder Belts ...............................................125
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 38
Signals, Turn ....................................42 , 96, 155
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 380
Favorites................................................... 384
Replay ...................................................... 383
SiriusXM Traffic ........................................ 441
SiriusXM Travel Link ................................. 440
Traffic & Weather ..................................... 384
SiriusXM Guardian ........................................ 458
SiriusXM Guardian FAQ ................................. 458
SiriusXM Guardian Trial Period ..................... 442
SiriusXM Guardian, Getting Started .............. 442
SiriusXM Guardian, Introduction ................... 441
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
......................................... 384
Favorites................................................... 384
Replay ...................................................... 383
Traffic and Weather .................................. 384
Smart Watch ................................................. 457
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 316
Snow Tires .................................................... 314
SOS Call ........................................................ 444
Spare Tire Changing ..................................... 262
Spare Tire Stowage ....................................... 264
Spare Tires .......................................... 314 , 315
Spark Plugs ................................................... 330
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
......................................... 330
Oil ............................................................. 330
Speed Control
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...................... 178
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........................... 178
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...................... 176
Starting ......................................................... 156
Button..........................................................15
Cold Weather ............................................ 157
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 156
Remote ........................................................16
Starting And Operating .................................. 156
Starting Procedures ...................................... 156
Steering
Tilt Column
...................................................35
Wheel, Heated .............................................35
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................35
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 376
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls
........................................................ 376
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ....................450 , 459
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................58
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 379
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 275
Sun Visor Extension .........................................71
Sunroof .....................................................64 , 66
Closing .........................................................64
Opening .......................................................64
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 132
Sway Control, Trailer ............................ 107 , 227
System, Remote Starting .................................16
11
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478
T
Telescoping Steering Column
.......................... 35
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 57
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 35
Time Delay
Headlight
.....................................................42
Tip Start .........................................................156
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........306
Tire Markings .................................................302
Tire Safety Information ..................................302
Tire Service Kit ..............................................268
Tire Stowage ..................................................264
Tires...................................155 , 309, 314, 318
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................312
Air Pressure ...............................................309
Chains .......................................................316
Changing ......................................... 262 , 302
Compact Spare .........................................314
General Information ........................ 309 , 314
High Speed ................................................310
Inflation Pressure ......................................310
Jacking ............................................ 262 , 302
Life Of Tires ...............................................312
Load Capacity .................................. 306 , 307
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..92, 117
Quality Grading ..........................................318
Radial ........................................................310
Replacement .............................................312
Rotation ....................................................317
Safety .............................................. 302 , 309
Sizes......................................................... 303
Snow Tires ................................................ 314
Spare Tires ...................................... 314 , 315
Spinning ................................................... 311
Trailer Towing ........................................... 230
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 312
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 229
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................................................ 277
Towing .......................................................... 226
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 276
Guide........................................................ 229
Recreational ............................................. 233
Weight ...................................................... 229
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 107
Trailer Towing ............................................... 226
Cooling System Tips ................................. 233
Hitches ..................................................... 228
Minimum Requirements ........................... 230
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 229
Wiring ....................................................... 231
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 229
Trailer Weight ................................................ 229
Transmission
Automatic
........................................ 165 , 301
Fluid ......................................................... 331
Manual ..................................................... 163
Transporting Pets .......................................... 153
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 312
Turn Signals ..............................................42 , 96
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 400
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 405
Uconnect Settings ...........18, 333, 344, 356
Uconnect App ................................................ 443
Uconnect Phone ...................................395 , 397
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 403
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 402
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 407
Call Continuation ...................................... 404
Call Controls ............................................. 401
Call Termination ....................................... 404
Cancel Command ..................................... 395
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................ 398
General Information ................................. 407
Help Command ......................................... 395
Join Calls .................................................. 404
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 399
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress
........................................ 403
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 400
Natural Speech ......................................... 395
Operation .................................................. 394
Overview ................................................... 393
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
479
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
...................................................395
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ..397
Phonebook Download ...............................399
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............403
Power-Up ...................................................407
Recent Calls ..............................................402
Redial ........................................................404
To Remove A Favorite ...............................400
Toggling Between Calls .............................404
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................402
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..405
Voice Command ........................................405
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features
............... 18, 26, 333, 344, 356
Passive Entry Programming ................26, 365
Uconnect System ...........................................371
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................318
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
........................................................72
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................325
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................127
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................40
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 449 , 459
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 456
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 455
Vehicle Loading ................................... 225 , 307
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 456
Vehicle Storage ................................................58
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 291
Voice Command ............................ 36 , 410, 413
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................36
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard
............................. 238
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
....................................................94
Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information .................................... 468
Washer
Adding Fluid
.............................................. 290
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 321
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 315
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 315
Wi-fi............................................................... 449
Wind Buffeting ...................................61 , 63, 65
Window Fogging ...............................................58
Windows
Power
...........................................................60
Windshield Defroster .................................... 154
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 293
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 293
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................45
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................46
Wrecker Towing ............................................. 276
11
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition
2020 RENEGADE
2020 RENEGADE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
